ecdl v5 module 6 print
DESCRIPTION
Module 6 - PresentationThis module enables candidates to demonstrate competence in using presentation tools on a computer. Candidates will be able to accomplish tasks such as creating, formatting, modifying and preparing presentations using different slide layouts for display and printed distribution. On completion of this module each candidate will be able to:• Work with presentations and save them in different file formats• Choose built-in options such as the Help function within the application to enhance productivity• Understand different presentation views and when to use them, choose different slide layouts and designs• Enter, edit and format text in presentations. Recognise good practice in applying unique titles to slides• Choose, create and format charts to communicate information meaningfully• Insert and edit pictures, images and drawn objects• Apply animation and transition effects to presentations and check and correct presentation content before finally printing and giving presentationsTRANSCRIPT
EEuropean
CComputer
DDriving
LLicence
EE CC DD LL SS yy ll ll aa bb uu ss 55 00
MMoodduullee 66
PPrreesseennttaattiioonn
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
i
Contents
USING THE APPLICATION 1
OPENING CLOSING MS POWERPOINT amp PRESENTATIONS 1
CREATING A NEW PRESENTATION 3
SAVING A PRESENTATION 4
SAVING A PRESENTATION AS ANOTHER FILE TYPE 5
SWITCHING BETWEEN OPEN PRESENTATIONS 5
MODIFYING USER PREFERENCES 5
USING HELP 6
MAGNIFICATION amp ZOOM TOOLS 7
BUILT-IN TOOLBARS 7
DEVELOPING A PRESENTATION 9
CHANGING BETWEEN PRESENTATION VIEW MODES 9
CHANGING THE SLIDE LAYOUT 9
USING DESIGN TEMPLATES 10
CHANGING THE BACKGROUND COLOUR 10
INSERTING NEW SLIDES 11
COPYING MOVING SLIDES 11
DELETING SLIDES 12
INSERTING A GRAPHICAL OBJECT INTO THE MASTER SLIDE 13
ADDING FOOTERS 14
TEXT 16
ADDING EDITING amp DELETING TEXT 16
MOVING amp COPYING TEXT16
USING UNDOREDO COMMAND 17
CHANGING FONT TYPES amp SIZES 17
TYPESTYLES BOLD ITALICS UNDERLINE amp SHADOW 18
CHANGING TEXT COLOUR 18
APPLYING CASE CHANGES TO TEXT 19
ALIGNING TEXT 19
APPLYING REMOVING INDENTATIONS 20
ADJUSTING LINE SPACING 20
APPLYING CHANGING BULLET amp NUMBER STYLES 21
ENTERING EDITING TEXT IN TABLE SLIDE 24
SELECTING ROWS COLUMNS amp ENTIRE TABLE 24
INSERTING DELETING ROWS amp COLUMNS 24
MODIFYING COLUMN WIDTHS amp ROW HEIGHTS 25
CHARTS 26
CREATING CHARTS 26
SELECTING A CHART 27
CHANGING THE CHART TYPE 27
ADDING REMOVING amp EDITING A CHART TITLE 28
ADDING DATA LABELS 28
CHANGING COLOUR IN A CHART 29
CREATING AN ORGANISATION CHART 29
ADDING REMOVING CO-WORKERS amp SUBORDINATES 30
ii
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS 31
SELECTING A GRAPHICAL OBJECT 31
COPYING MOVING GRAPHICAL OBJECTS 32
RESIZING DELETING GRAPHICAL OBJECTS 32
ROTATING FLIPPING A GRAPHICAL OBJECT 33
ALIGNING A GRAPHICAL OBJECT 34
INSERTING DRAWN OBJECTS 34
ADDING TEXT TO A DRAWN OBJECT 36
FORMATTING DRAWN OBJECTS 36
CHANGING THE ARROW START FINISH STYLE 36
APPLYING SHADOW TO A SHAPE 37
GROUPING UNGROUPING DRAWN OBJECTS 37
BRINGING AN OBJECT TO THE FRONT OR SENDING IT TO THE BACK 38
PREPARING OUTPUTS 39
ADDING REMOVING TRANSITION EFFECTS 39
ADDING REMOVING PRESET ANIMATIONS 39
ADDING PRESENTER‟S NOTES 40
SELECTING AN OUTPUT FORMAT 41
HIDING SHOWING SLIDES 41
SPELL CHECKING A PRESENTATION 42
PRINTING 43
RUNNING THE SLIDE SHOW 45
Courseware compiled by
James Cilia
2009
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
1
USING THE APPLICATION
Presentation software is a program designed for the production and display of
computer text and graphics usually for presentation to a group It is intended
primarily to replace the functions typically associated with a slide or an overhead
projector Besides presentation software you will need additional hardware ndash the data
projector ndash to project your presentations on a display surface (eg whiteboard
screen)
MS PowerPoint comes in a variety of versions Over the years the program has been
updated making it more powerful and easier to use These course notes are based on
MS PowerPoint 2003
Opening Closing MS PowerPoint amp Presentations
To open MS PowerPoint
1 Click Start button
2 Select All Programs
3 Click Microsoft PowerPoint
2
Features of the MS PowerPoint Screen
MS PowerPoint opens in the Normal view
The title bar shows the name of the presentation PowerPoint assigns your
presentation a temporary name (eg Presentation1) until you save it with the
name you choose
The menu bar is used to choose all commands while working in PowerPoint
The toolbars provide quick access to some of PowerPoint‟s commands without
having to use a pull-down menu
The slide pane displays a large view of the current slide
The notes pane is the area where you type notes that you want to accompany
a slide
The status bar located at the bottom of the screen displays the slide number
and the name of the slide design
Basic Terms
A presentation is a collection of slides audience handouts and speaker‟s notes all in
one file
Slides are the individual bdquopages‟ or overhead transparencies of the presentation
Slides can have titles text charts drawn objects and clip arts They can be
presented on a screen or as black-and-white transparencies or as colour overhead
transparencies or 35mm slides
A Slide show is a group of slides organised in a specific order or with a specific choice
of paths from one slide to the next
To close MS PowerPoint
1 Click File menu
2 Click Exit
Note that
You can close MS PowerPoint using the shortcut key combination ALT+F4
keys
To open an existing presentation
1 Click Open button
2 Click the drop-down arrow in the Look in field and select the drive andor
folder that contain the presentation to open
3 Double-click the presentation you want to open
Note that
You can open a recently used presentation using the File menu By default
the File menu displays a list of 4 recently used presentations
You can also open a recently used presentation using the New Presentation
task pane In the Open a presentation section click the name of the
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
3
presentation to open If the Task Pane is not visible click View menu and
Task Pane
You can open a presentation workbook using the shortcut key combination
CTRL+O keys
To open other existing presentations repeat steps 1-3
To close an existing presentation
1 Save your work
2 Click File menu
3 Click Close command
Note that
You can close a presentation using the shortcut key combination CTRL+F4
keys
Creating a New Presentation
By default all new presentations are created on a standard (or default) template
Click New button
Note that
You also open a new presentation based on the default
template using the New Presentation task pane In the
New section click Blank Presentation
You can open a new workbook using the shortcut key combination CTRL+N
keys
4
Saving a Presentation
It is important to save your work from time to time whilst typing When you save a
presentation for the first time you need to give it a name Presentation names can
have up to 255 characters including spaces File names cannot include any of the
following characters forward slash () backslash () greater than sign (gt) less than
sign (lt) asterisk () period () question mark () quotation mark () pipe symbol
(|) colon () or semicolon ()
To save a presentation to a location or drive
1 Click Save button
2 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved By default the file will be saved
on Drive C in the My Documents folder
3 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
4 Click Save button
Note that
After you save a file for the first time the filename appears in the title bar
When you save the file the second third fourth time etc the computer will
not ask you to input all this information again but will only update the file with
the changes made up to that moment
You can save a presentation using the shortcut key combination CTRL+S
keys
To save an open presentation under another name
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Repeat steps 2-4 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
5
Saving a Presentation as another File Type
You can save a presentation as another file type Rich Text Format template show
image file format and version number
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved
4 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
5 Click the Save as type drop down arrow
6 Click the file format that you want the file saved in eg PowerPoint 95 (ppt)
7 Click Save button
Note that
The facility to save a presentation to another format can be useful so that this
can be read by previous versions of MS PowerPoint
Switching between Open Presentations
You can switch between two or more open presentations by
4 Click Window menu
5 Click the name of the presentation to display
Note that
To switch between open presentations you can click on the presentation file
button on the task bar (running horizontally across the bottom of the MS
Windows screen)
Modifying User Preferences
You can modify the author‟s name attached to every workbook generated in MS
PowerPoint as follows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Optionshellip The Options dialog box will be displayed
3 In the General tab card type in the appropriate information in the Name field
4 Click OK button
6
You can also set a folder location where all presentations will be saved
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for modifying the user name
2 In the Save tab card in the Default file location field type in the drivefolder
where the presentations will be saved
3 Click OK button
Using Help
1 Click Help menu
2 Click Microsoft PowerPoint Help The office assistant is displayed
3 Type a keyword or question in the Answer Wizard box
4 Click Search button
5 Click the topic to display
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
7
Magnification amp Zoom Tools
The zoom feature allows you to enlarge or reduce the view of a page on
the screen MS PowerPoint offers two ways of zooming ndash the zoom tool
on the standard toolbar and the zoom dialog box in the View menu
1 Click Zoom control button
2 Select the appropriate option At 100 the text and images
are the same size they will be when you print them Below
100 they are smaller Above 100 they are bigger
Note that
You can also type in any percentage value in the zoom textbox
Built-in Toolbars
A toolbar is a rowcolumn of buttonsicons These buttons are used to accomplish
tasks quickly without opening menus By default MS PowerPoint displays three
toolbars - the Standard Formatting and Drawing toolbars The Standard and
Formatting toolbars are displayed on a single row
To display the Standard and Formatting toolbars on two separate rows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Customizehellip The Customize dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Options tab card tick the option Show Standard and Formatting
Toolbars on two rows
4 Click Close button
8
To display additional toolbars
1 Click View menu
2 Select Toolbars
3 Click on the toolbar to put one display The selected toolbar is displayed on
the screen
Toolbars are not fixed to any part of the MS PowerPoint screen ndash they can float
Accordingly you can move toolbars to any part of the screen by dragging them
To move a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Drag the toolbar to any part of the screen
3 Release the mouse button when the toolbar is at the desired location
To turn a fixed toolbar into a floating toolbar
1 Position the mouse pointer on an empty part ie an area without any buttons
of the toolbar to detach
2 Double-click the mouse
To re-attach a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Double-click the mouse
The toolbar moves to its home port at the top or bottom of the screen
To hide a toolbar
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Toolbars A sub-menu displaying available toolbars will be displayed
The toolbars which are currently displayed in MS PowerPoint will have a check
mark
3 Click the check marked toolbar to hide the toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
9
DEVELOPING A PRESENTATION
Changing between Presentation View Modes
You can view MS PowerPoint Presentations in different page display modes
1 Click View menu
2 Select Normal Slide Sorter Notes Pages or Slide Show view
Depending on the task at hand some views are better than others
Option To Do This
Normal Contains three panes the outline pane the slide pane and the notes pane These panes let you work on all aspects of your presentation in one place You can adjust
the size of the different panes by dragging the pane borders
Slide Sorter Displays a miniature version of all the slides in your presentation You can use this to check the consistency of the layout and colour scheme You change the order of slides delete slides add timings and select animated transitions for moving from slide to slide
Notes Pages Used to add the speaker‟s or presenter‟s notes or information to be shared with the audience
Slide Show Used to view slides full-screen (without any menu bars) exactly as they would appear projected To exit from Slide Show view press the ESC key
Note that
You can also switch to different views using the view buttons at the bottom
left corner of the PowerPoint screen
Changing the Slide Layout
During this course you will be using the following slide layouts
Title Slide Title amp Text Title amp 2 Column
Text
Title Only
Title amp Chart Title amp Table Text amp Clip art Organisation
Chart
Slide Sorter View
Normal View Slide Show
10
To change the layout of a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide LayouthellipThe Slide Layout task pane will be displayed
3 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to apply a layout
to
4 In the Slide Layout task pane point to the layout you want and then click it
Note that
If you skip step 3 the formatting will be applied to the current slide
Using Design Templates
You don‟t need to be a professional graphic designer to enhance the presentation of
your slides MS PowerPoint comes with many artist-created templates A template is
a presentation in which the masters and the colours have been especially designed for
a particular bdquolook‟ Templates define what your text will look like and where it will
appear and they offer a complete colour scheme
Using the Slide Design task pane you can preview and apply a design template to
your presentation The template can be applied to all slides or selected slides and you
can apply more than one type of design template in a single presentation
To apply a design template to a presentation
1 Click Slide Design button on the Formatting toolbar The Slide
Design task pane will be displayed
2 Click Design Templates in the Slide Design task pane
3 Click the template you want to apply to all the slides
Note that
To apply a template to a single slide select the thumbnail on the Slides tab in
the task pane point to the template and click the arrow and then click Apply
to Selected Slides
To apply a template to multiple selected slides select the thumbnails on the
Slides tab and in the task pane click the template
The design templates you have applied appear below the Recently Used list in
the Slide Design All available design templates appear under Available for
use
To change between available templates repeat steps 1-3 as above
Changing the Background Colour
You can change the background color of a specific slide or all the slides in the
presentation Changing the background is useful if you want to change the background
to emphasize sections of a presentation Besides changing the color you can add
shading a pattern a texture or a picture
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
11
To change the slide background colour
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Background The Background dialog
box will be displayed
3 Under Background fill click the arrow on
the right of the box and then select the
appropriate option
4 Click Apply button or Apply to All button
Note that
If you click the Apply button the background will be applied only to the active
slide or selected slides
Inserting New Slides
Each time you insert a new slide you will choose a speicific layout depending on the
content of the slide Layout refers to the way content is arranged in a slide A layout
contains placeholders which in turn hold text such as titles and bulleted lists and slide
content such as tables charts pictures shapes and clip art
By default the Title Slide layout will be displayed when you open a new presentation
file This layout contains two placeholders ndash the main title and the subtitle placeholder
To insert a new blank slide do either of the following
1 On the Formatting toolbar click New Slide button
2 In the Slide Layout task pane click the layout you want
Note that
If the insertion point is in the Outline or Slides
tab you can insert a new slide by pressing
Enter key
You can also insert a new slide from the Slide
Layout task pane point to a layout click the
arrow and then click Insert New Slide
If you want to keep the Slide Layout task pane
from displaying each time you click New Slide
clear the Show when inserting new slides
check box at the bottom of the pane
Copying Moving Slides
You can copy an entire slide within the same presentation file
1 Click View menu
2 Click Slide Sorter
3 Click the slide to copy A blue frame will be displayed around the selected
slide
4 Click Copy button
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
i
Contents
USING THE APPLICATION 1
OPENING CLOSING MS POWERPOINT amp PRESENTATIONS 1
CREATING A NEW PRESENTATION 3
SAVING A PRESENTATION 4
SAVING A PRESENTATION AS ANOTHER FILE TYPE 5
SWITCHING BETWEEN OPEN PRESENTATIONS 5
MODIFYING USER PREFERENCES 5
USING HELP 6
MAGNIFICATION amp ZOOM TOOLS 7
BUILT-IN TOOLBARS 7
DEVELOPING A PRESENTATION 9
CHANGING BETWEEN PRESENTATION VIEW MODES 9
CHANGING THE SLIDE LAYOUT 9
USING DESIGN TEMPLATES 10
CHANGING THE BACKGROUND COLOUR 10
INSERTING NEW SLIDES 11
COPYING MOVING SLIDES 11
DELETING SLIDES 12
INSERTING A GRAPHICAL OBJECT INTO THE MASTER SLIDE 13
ADDING FOOTERS 14
TEXT 16
ADDING EDITING amp DELETING TEXT 16
MOVING amp COPYING TEXT16
USING UNDOREDO COMMAND 17
CHANGING FONT TYPES amp SIZES 17
TYPESTYLES BOLD ITALICS UNDERLINE amp SHADOW 18
CHANGING TEXT COLOUR 18
APPLYING CASE CHANGES TO TEXT 19
ALIGNING TEXT 19
APPLYING REMOVING INDENTATIONS 20
ADJUSTING LINE SPACING 20
APPLYING CHANGING BULLET amp NUMBER STYLES 21
ENTERING EDITING TEXT IN TABLE SLIDE 24
SELECTING ROWS COLUMNS amp ENTIRE TABLE 24
INSERTING DELETING ROWS amp COLUMNS 24
MODIFYING COLUMN WIDTHS amp ROW HEIGHTS 25
CHARTS 26
CREATING CHARTS 26
SELECTING A CHART 27
CHANGING THE CHART TYPE 27
ADDING REMOVING amp EDITING A CHART TITLE 28
ADDING DATA LABELS 28
CHANGING COLOUR IN A CHART 29
CREATING AN ORGANISATION CHART 29
ADDING REMOVING CO-WORKERS amp SUBORDINATES 30
ii
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS 31
SELECTING A GRAPHICAL OBJECT 31
COPYING MOVING GRAPHICAL OBJECTS 32
RESIZING DELETING GRAPHICAL OBJECTS 32
ROTATING FLIPPING A GRAPHICAL OBJECT 33
ALIGNING A GRAPHICAL OBJECT 34
INSERTING DRAWN OBJECTS 34
ADDING TEXT TO A DRAWN OBJECT 36
FORMATTING DRAWN OBJECTS 36
CHANGING THE ARROW START FINISH STYLE 36
APPLYING SHADOW TO A SHAPE 37
GROUPING UNGROUPING DRAWN OBJECTS 37
BRINGING AN OBJECT TO THE FRONT OR SENDING IT TO THE BACK 38
PREPARING OUTPUTS 39
ADDING REMOVING TRANSITION EFFECTS 39
ADDING REMOVING PRESET ANIMATIONS 39
ADDING PRESENTER‟S NOTES 40
SELECTING AN OUTPUT FORMAT 41
HIDING SHOWING SLIDES 41
SPELL CHECKING A PRESENTATION 42
PRINTING 43
RUNNING THE SLIDE SHOW 45
Courseware compiled by
James Cilia
2009
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
1
USING THE APPLICATION
Presentation software is a program designed for the production and display of
computer text and graphics usually for presentation to a group It is intended
primarily to replace the functions typically associated with a slide or an overhead
projector Besides presentation software you will need additional hardware ndash the data
projector ndash to project your presentations on a display surface (eg whiteboard
screen)
MS PowerPoint comes in a variety of versions Over the years the program has been
updated making it more powerful and easier to use These course notes are based on
MS PowerPoint 2003
Opening Closing MS PowerPoint amp Presentations
To open MS PowerPoint
1 Click Start button
2 Select All Programs
3 Click Microsoft PowerPoint
2
Features of the MS PowerPoint Screen
MS PowerPoint opens in the Normal view
The title bar shows the name of the presentation PowerPoint assigns your
presentation a temporary name (eg Presentation1) until you save it with the
name you choose
The menu bar is used to choose all commands while working in PowerPoint
The toolbars provide quick access to some of PowerPoint‟s commands without
having to use a pull-down menu
The slide pane displays a large view of the current slide
The notes pane is the area where you type notes that you want to accompany
a slide
The status bar located at the bottom of the screen displays the slide number
and the name of the slide design
Basic Terms
A presentation is a collection of slides audience handouts and speaker‟s notes all in
one file
Slides are the individual bdquopages‟ or overhead transparencies of the presentation
Slides can have titles text charts drawn objects and clip arts They can be
presented on a screen or as black-and-white transparencies or as colour overhead
transparencies or 35mm slides
A Slide show is a group of slides organised in a specific order or with a specific choice
of paths from one slide to the next
To close MS PowerPoint
1 Click File menu
2 Click Exit
Note that
You can close MS PowerPoint using the shortcut key combination ALT+F4
keys
To open an existing presentation
1 Click Open button
2 Click the drop-down arrow in the Look in field and select the drive andor
folder that contain the presentation to open
3 Double-click the presentation you want to open
Note that
You can open a recently used presentation using the File menu By default
the File menu displays a list of 4 recently used presentations
You can also open a recently used presentation using the New Presentation
task pane In the Open a presentation section click the name of the
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
3
presentation to open If the Task Pane is not visible click View menu and
Task Pane
You can open a presentation workbook using the shortcut key combination
CTRL+O keys
To open other existing presentations repeat steps 1-3
To close an existing presentation
1 Save your work
2 Click File menu
3 Click Close command
Note that
You can close a presentation using the shortcut key combination CTRL+F4
keys
Creating a New Presentation
By default all new presentations are created on a standard (or default) template
Click New button
Note that
You also open a new presentation based on the default
template using the New Presentation task pane In the
New section click Blank Presentation
You can open a new workbook using the shortcut key combination CTRL+N
keys
4
Saving a Presentation
It is important to save your work from time to time whilst typing When you save a
presentation for the first time you need to give it a name Presentation names can
have up to 255 characters including spaces File names cannot include any of the
following characters forward slash () backslash () greater than sign (gt) less than
sign (lt) asterisk () period () question mark () quotation mark () pipe symbol
(|) colon () or semicolon ()
To save a presentation to a location or drive
1 Click Save button
2 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved By default the file will be saved
on Drive C in the My Documents folder
3 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
4 Click Save button
Note that
After you save a file for the first time the filename appears in the title bar
When you save the file the second third fourth time etc the computer will
not ask you to input all this information again but will only update the file with
the changes made up to that moment
You can save a presentation using the shortcut key combination CTRL+S
keys
To save an open presentation under another name
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Repeat steps 2-4 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
5
Saving a Presentation as another File Type
You can save a presentation as another file type Rich Text Format template show
image file format and version number
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved
4 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
5 Click the Save as type drop down arrow
6 Click the file format that you want the file saved in eg PowerPoint 95 (ppt)
7 Click Save button
Note that
The facility to save a presentation to another format can be useful so that this
can be read by previous versions of MS PowerPoint
Switching between Open Presentations
You can switch between two or more open presentations by
4 Click Window menu
5 Click the name of the presentation to display
Note that
To switch between open presentations you can click on the presentation file
button on the task bar (running horizontally across the bottom of the MS
Windows screen)
Modifying User Preferences
You can modify the author‟s name attached to every workbook generated in MS
PowerPoint as follows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Optionshellip The Options dialog box will be displayed
3 In the General tab card type in the appropriate information in the Name field
4 Click OK button
6
You can also set a folder location where all presentations will be saved
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for modifying the user name
2 In the Save tab card in the Default file location field type in the drivefolder
where the presentations will be saved
3 Click OK button
Using Help
1 Click Help menu
2 Click Microsoft PowerPoint Help The office assistant is displayed
3 Type a keyword or question in the Answer Wizard box
4 Click Search button
5 Click the topic to display
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
7
Magnification amp Zoom Tools
The zoom feature allows you to enlarge or reduce the view of a page on
the screen MS PowerPoint offers two ways of zooming ndash the zoom tool
on the standard toolbar and the zoom dialog box in the View menu
1 Click Zoom control button
2 Select the appropriate option At 100 the text and images
are the same size they will be when you print them Below
100 they are smaller Above 100 they are bigger
Note that
You can also type in any percentage value in the zoom textbox
Built-in Toolbars
A toolbar is a rowcolumn of buttonsicons These buttons are used to accomplish
tasks quickly without opening menus By default MS PowerPoint displays three
toolbars - the Standard Formatting and Drawing toolbars The Standard and
Formatting toolbars are displayed on a single row
To display the Standard and Formatting toolbars on two separate rows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Customizehellip The Customize dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Options tab card tick the option Show Standard and Formatting
Toolbars on two rows
4 Click Close button
8
To display additional toolbars
1 Click View menu
2 Select Toolbars
3 Click on the toolbar to put one display The selected toolbar is displayed on
the screen
Toolbars are not fixed to any part of the MS PowerPoint screen ndash they can float
Accordingly you can move toolbars to any part of the screen by dragging them
To move a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Drag the toolbar to any part of the screen
3 Release the mouse button when the toolbar is at the desired location
To turn a fixed toolbar into a floating toolbar
1 Position the mouse pointer on an empty part ie an area without any buttons
of the toolbar to detach
2 Double-click the mouse
To re-attach a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Double-click the mouse
The toolbar moves to its home port at the top or bottom of the screen
To hide a toolbar
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Toolbars A sub-menu displaying available toolbars will be displayed
The toolbars which are currently displayed in MS PowerPoint will have a check
mark
3 Click the check marked toolbar to hide the toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
9
DEVELOPING A PRESENTATION
Changing between Presentation View Modes
You can view MS PowerPoint Presentations in different page display modes
1 Click View menu
2 Select Normal Slide Sorter Notes Pages or Slide Show view
Depending on the task at hand some views are better than others
Option To Do This
Normal Contains three panes the outline pane the slide pane and the notes pane These panes let you work on all aspects of your presentation in one place You can adjust
the size of the different panes by dragging the pane borders
Slide Sorter Displays a miniature version of all the slides in your presentation You can use this to check the consistency of the layout and colour scheme You change the order of slides delete slides add timings and select animated transitions for moving from slide to slide
Notes Pages Used to add the speaker‟s or presenter‟s notes or information to be shared with the audience
Slide Show Used to view slides full-screen (without any menu bars) exactly as they would appear projected To exit from Slide Show view press the ESC key
Note that
You can also switch to different views using the view buttons at the bottom
left corner of the PowerPoint screen
Changing the Slide Layout
During this course you will be using the following slide layouts
Title Slide Title amp Text Title amp 2 Column
Text
Title Only
Title amp Chart Title amp Table Text amp Clip art Organisation
Chart
Slide Sorter View
Normal View Slide Show
10
To change the layout of a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide LayouthellipThe Slide Layout task pane will be displayed
3 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to apply a layout
to
4 In the Slide Layout task pane point to the layout you want and then click it
Note that
If you skip step 3 the formatting will be applied to the current slide
Using Design Templates
You don‟t need to be a professional graphic designer to enhance the presentation of
your slides MS PowerPoint comes with many artist-created templates A template is
a presentation in which the masters and the colours have been especially designed for
a particular bdquolook‟ Templates define what your text will look like and where it will
appear and they offer a complete colour scheme
Using the Slide Design task pane you can preview and apply a design template to
your presentation The template can be applied to all slides or selected slides and you
can apply more than one type of design template in a single presentation
To apply a design template to a presentation
1 Click Slide Design button on the Formatting toolbar The Slide
Design task pane will be displayed
2 Click Design Templates in the Slide Design task pane
3 Click the template you want to apply to all the slides
Note that
To apply a template to a single slide select the thumbnail on the Slides tab in
the task pane point to the template and click the arrow and then click Apply
to Selected Slides
To apply a template to multiple selected slides select the thumbnails on the
Slides tab and in the task pane click the template
The design templates you have applied appear below the Recently Used list in
the Slide Design All available design templates appear under Available for
use
To change between available templates repeat steps 1-3 as above
Changing the Background Colour
You can change the background color of a specific slide or all the slides in the
presentation Changing the background is useful if you want to change the background
to emphasize sections of a presentation Besides changing the color you can add
shading a pattern a texture or a picture
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
11
To change the slide background colour
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Background The Background dialog
box will be displayed
3 Under Background fill click the arrow on
the right of the box and then select the
appropriate option
4 Click Apply button or Apply to All button
Note that
If you click the Apply button the background will be applied only to the active
slide or selected slides
Inserting New Slides
Each time you insert a new slide you will choose a speicific layout depending on the
content of the slide Layout refers to the way content is arranged in a slide A layout
contains placeholders which in turn hold text such as titles and bulleted lists and slide
content such as tables charts pictures shapes and clip art
By default the Title Slide layout will be displayed when you open a new presentation
file This layout contains two placeholders ndash the main title and the subtitle placeholder
To insert a new blank slide do either of the following
1 On the Formatting toolbar click New Slide button
2 In the Slide Layout task pane click the layout you want
Note that
If the insertion point is in the Outline or Slides
tab you can insert a new slide by pressing
Enter key
You can also insert a new slide from the Slide
Layout task pane point to a layout click the
arrow and then click Insert New Slide
If you want to keep the Slide Layout task pane
from displaying each time you click New Slide
clear the Show when inserting new slides
check box at the bottom of the pane
Copying Moving Slides
You can copy an entire slide within the same presentation file
1 Click View menu
2 Click Slide Sorter
3 Click the slide to copy A blue frame will be displayed around the selected
slide
4 Click Copy button
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ii
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS 31
SELECTING A GRAPHICAL OBJECT 31
COPYING MOVING GRAPHICAL OBJECTS 32
RESIZING DELETING GRAPHICAL OBJECTS 32
ROTATING FLIPPING A GRAPHICAL OBJECT 33
ALIGNING A GRAPHICAL OBJECT 34
INSERTING DRAWN OBJECTS 34
ADDING TEXT TO A DRAWN OBJECT 36
FORMATTING DRAWN OBJECTS 36
CHANGING THE ARROW START FINISH STYLE 36
APPLYING SHADOW TO A SHAPE 37
GROUPING UNGROUPING DRAWN OBJECTS 37
BRINGING AN OBJECT TO THE FRONT OR SENDING IT TO THE BACK 38
PREPARING OUTPUTS 39
ADDING REMOVING TRANSITION EFFECTS 39
ADDING REMOVING PRESET ANIMATIONS 39
ADDING PRESENTER‟S NOTES 40
SELECTING AN OUTPUT FORMAT 41
HIDING SHOWING SLIDES 41
SPELL CHECKING A PRESENTATION 42
PRINTING 43
RUNNING THE SLIDE SHOW 45
Courseware compiled by
James Cilia
2009
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
1
USING THE APPLICATION
Presentation software is a program designed for the production and display of
computer text and graphics usually for presentation to a group It is intended
primarily to replace the functions typically associated with a slide or an overhead
projector Besides presentation software you will need additional hardware ndash the data
projector ndash to project your presentations on a display surface (eg whiteboard
screen)
MS PowerPoint comes in a variety of versions Over the years the program has been
updated making it more powerful and easier to use These course notes are based on
MS PowerPoint 2003
Opening Closing MS PowerPoint amp Presentations
To open MS PowerPoint
1 Click Start button
2 Select All Programs
3 Click Microsoft PowerPoint
2
Features of the MS PowerPoint Screen
MS PowerPoint opens in the Normal view
The title bar shows the name of the presentation PowerPoint assigns your
presentation a temporary name (eg Presentation1) until you save it with the
name you choose
The menu bar is used to choose all commands while working in PowerPoint
The toolbars provide quick access to some of PowerPoint‟s commands without
having to use a pull-down menu
The slide pane displays a large view of the current slide
The notes pane is the area where you type notes that you want to accompany
a slide
The status bar located at the bottom of the screen displays the slide number
and the name of the slide design
Basic Terms
A presentation is a collection of slides audience handouts and speaker‟s notes all in
one file
Slides are the individual bdquopages‟ or overhead transparencies of the presentation
Slides can have titles text charts drawn objects and clip arts They can be
presented on a screen or as black-and-white transparencies or as colour overhead
transparencies or 35mm slides
A Slide show is a group of slides organised in a specific order or with a specific choice
of paths from one slide to the next
To close MS PowerPoint
1 Click File menu
2 Click Exit
Note that
You can close MS PowerPoint using the shortcut key combination ALT+F4
keys
To open an existing presentation
1 Click Open button
2 Click the drop-down arrow in the Look in field and select the drive andor
folder that contain the presentation to open
3 Double-click the presentation you want to open
Note that
You can open a recently used presentation using the File menu By default
the File menu displays a list of 4 recently used presentations
You can also open a recently used presentation using the New Presentation
task pane In the Open a presentation section click the name of the
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
3
presentation to open If the Task Pane is not visible click View menu and
Task Pane
You can open a presentation workbook using the shortcut key combination
CTRL+O keys
To open other existing presentations repeat steps 1-3
To close an existing presentation
1 Save your work
2 Click File menu
3 Click Close command
Note that
You can close a presentation using the shortcut key combination CTRL+F4
keys
Creating a New Presentation
By default all new presentations are created on a standard (or default) template
Click New button
Note that
You also open a new presentation based on the default
template using the New Presentation task pane In the
New section click Blank Presentation
You can open a new workbook using the shortcut key combination CTRL+N
keys
4
Saving a Presentation
It is important to save your work from time to time whilst typing When you save a
presentation for the first time you need to give it a name Presentation names can
have up to 255 characters including spaces File names cannot include any of the
following characters forward slash () backslash () greater than sign (gt) less than
sign (lt) asterisk () period () question mark () quotation mark () pipe symbol
(|) colon () or semicolon ()
To save a presentation to a location or drive
1 Click Save button
2 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved By default the file will be saved
on Drive C in the My Documents folder
3 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
4 Click Save button
Note that
After you save a file for the first time the filename appears in the title bar
When you save the file the second third fourth time etc the computer will
not ask you to input all this information again but will only update the file with
the changes made up to that moment
You can save a presentation using the shortcut key combination CTRL+S
keys
To save an open presentation under another name
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Repeat steps 2-4 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
5
Saving a Presentation as another File Type
You can save a presentation as another file type Rich Text Format template show
image file format and version number
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved
4 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
5 Click the Save as type drop down arrow
6 Click the file format that you want the file saved in eg PowerPoint 95 (ppt)
7 Click Save button
Note that
The facility to save a presentation to another format can be useful so that this
can be read by previous versions of MS PowerPoint
Switching between Open Presentations
You can switch between two or more open presentations by
4 Click Window menu
5 Click the name of the presentation to display
Note that
To switch between open presentations you can click on the presentation file
button on the task bar (running horizontally across the bottom of the MS
Windows screen)
Modifying User Preferences
You can modify the author‟s name attached to every workbook generated in MS
PowerPoint as follows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Optionshellip The Options dialog box will be displayed
3 In the General tab card type in the appropriate information in the Name field
4 Click OK button
6
You can also set a folder location where all presentations will be saved
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for modifying the user name
2 In the Save tab card in the Default file location field type in the drivefolder
where the presentations will be saved
3 Click OK button
Using Help
1 Click Help menu
2 Click Microsoft PowerPoint Help The office assistant is displayed
3 Type a keyword or question in the Answer Wizard box
4 Click Search button
5 Click the topic to display
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
7
Magnification amp Zoom Tools
The zoom feature allows you to enlarge or reduce the view of a page on
the screen MS PowerPoint offers two ways of zooming ndash the zoom tool
on the standard toolbar and the zoom dialog box in the View menu
1 Click Zoom control button
2 Select the appropriate option At 100 the text and images
are the same size they will be when you print them Below
100 they are smaller Above 100 they are bigger
Note that
You can also type in any percentage value in the zoom textbox
Built-in Toolbars
A toolbar is a rowcolumn of buttonsicons These buttons are used to accomplish
tasks quickly without opening menus By default MS PowerPoint displays three
toolbars - the Standard Formatting and Drawing toolbars The Standard and
Formatting toolbars are displayed on a single row
To display the Standard and Formatting toolbars on two separate rows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Customizehellip The Customize dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Options tab card tick the option Show Standard and Formatting
Toolbars on two rows
4 Click Close button
8
To display additional toolbars
1 Click View menu
2 Select Toolbars
3 Click on the toolbar to put one display The selected toolbar is displayed on
the screen
Toolbars are not fixed to any part of the MS PowerPoint screen ndash they can float
Accordingly you can move toolbars to any part of the screen by dragging them
To move a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Drag the toolbar to any part of the screen
3 Release the mouse button when the toolbar is at the desired location
To turn a fixed toolbar into a floating toolbar
1 Position the mouse pointer on an empty part ie an area without any buttons
of the toolbar to detach
2 Double-click the mouse
To re-attach a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Double-click the mouse
The toolbar moves to its home port at the top or bottom of the screen
To hide a toolbar
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Toolbars A sub-menu displaying available toolbars will be displayed
The toolbars which are currently displayed in MS PowerPoint will have a check
mark
3 Click the check marked toolbar to hide the toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
9
DEVELOPING A PRESENTATION
Changing between Presentation View Modes
You can view MS PowerPoint Presentations in different page display modes
1 Click View menu
2 Select Normal Slide Sorter Notes Pages or Slide Show view
Depending on the task at hand some views are better than others
Option To Do This
Normal Contains three panes the outline pane the slide pane and the notes pane These panes let you work on all aspects of your presentation in one place You can adjust
the size of the different panes by dragging the pane borders
Slide Sorter Displays a miniature version of all the slides in your presentation You can use this to check the consistency of the layout and colour scheme You change the order of slides delete slides add timings and select animated transitions for moving from slide to slide
Notes Pages Used to add the speaker‟s or presenter‟s notes or information to be shared with the audience
Slide Show Used to view slides full-screen (without any menu bars) exactly as they would appear projected To exit from Slide Show view press the ESC key
Note that
You can also switch to different views using the view buttons at the bottom
left corner of the PowerPoint screen
Changing the Slide Layout
During this course you will be using the following slide layouts
Title Slide Title amp Text Title amp 2 Column
Text
Title Only
Title amp Chart Title amp Table Text amp Clip art Organisation
Chart
Slide Sorter View
Normal View Slide Show
10
To change the layout of a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide LayouthellipThe Slide Layout task pane will be displayed
3 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to apply a layout
to
4 In the Slide Layout task pane point to the layout you want and then click it
Note that
If you skip step 3 the formatting will be applied to the current slide
Using Design Templates
You don‟t need to be a professional graphic designer to enhance the presentation of
your slides MS PowerPoint comes with many artist-created templates A template is
a presentation in which the masters and the colours have been especially designed for
a particular bdquolook‟ Templates define what your text will look like and where it will
appear and they offer a complete colour scheme
Using the Slide Design task pane you can preview and apply a design template to
your presentation The template can be applied to all slides or selected slides and you
can apply more than one type of design template in a single presentation
To apply a design template to a presentation
1 Click Slide Design button on the Formatting toolbar The Slide
Design task pane will be displayed
2 Click Design Templates in the Slide Design task pane
3 Click the template you want to apply to all the slides
Note that
To apply a template to a single slide select the thumbnail on the Slides tab in
the task pane point to the template and click the arrow and then click Apply
to Selected Slides
To apply a template to multiple selected slides select the thumbnails on the
Slides tab and in the task pane click the template
The design templates you have applied appear below the Recently Used list in
the Slide Design All available design templates appear under Available for
use
To change between available templates repeat steps 1-3 as above
Changing the Background Colour
You can change the background color of a specific slide or all the slides in the
presentation Changing the background is useful if you want to change the background
to emphasize sections of a presentation Besides changing the color you can add
shading a pattern a texture or a picture
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
11
To change the slide background colour
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Background The Background dialog
box will be displayed
3 Under Background fill click the arrow on
the right of the box and then select the
appropriate option
4 Click Apply button or Apply to All button
Note that
If you click the Apply button the background will be applied only to the active
slide or selected slides
Inserting New Slides
Each time you insert a new slide you will choose a speicific layout depending on the
content of the slide Layout refers to the way content is arranged in a slide A layout
contains placeholders which in turn hold text such as titles and bulleted lists and slide
content such as tables charts pictures shapes and clip art
By default the Title Slide layout will be displayed when you open a new presentation
file This layout contains two placeholders ndash the main title and the subtitle placeholder
To insert a new blank slide do either of the following
1 On the Formatting toolbar click New Slide button
2 In the Slide Layout task pane click the layout you want
Note that
If the insertion point is in the Outline or Slides
tab you can insert a new slide by pressing
Enter key
You can also insert a new slide from the Slide
Layout task pane point to a layout click the
arrow and then click Insert New Slide
If you want to keep the Slide Layout task pane
from displaying each time you click New Slide
clear the Show when inserting new slides
check box at the bottom of the pane
Copying Moving Slides
You can copy an entire slide within the same presentation file
1 Click View menu
2 Click Slide Sorter
3 Click the slide to copy A blue frame will be displayed around the selected
slide
4 Click Copy button
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
1
USING THE APPLICATION
Presentation software is a program designed for the production and display of
computer text and graphics usually for presentation to a group It is intended
primarily to replace the functions typically associated with a slide or an overhead
projector Besides presentation software you will need additional hardware ndash the data
projector ndash to project your presentations on a display surface (eg whiteboard
screen)
MS PowerPoint comes in a variety of versions Over the years the program has been
updated making it more powerful and easier to use These course notes are based on
MS PowerPoint 2003
Opening Closing MS PowerPoint amp Presentations
To open MS PowerPoint
1 Click Start button
2 Select All Programs
3 Click Microsoft PowerPoint
2
Features of the MS PowerPoint Screen
MS PowerPoint opens in the Normal view
The title bar shows the name of the presentation PowerPoint assigns your
presentation a temporary name (eg Presentation1) until you save it with the
name you choose
The menu bar is used to choose all commands while working in PowerPoint
The toolbars provide quick access to some of PowerPoint‟s commands without
having to use a pull-down menu
The slide pane displays a large view of the current slide
The notes pane is the area where you type notes that you want to accompany
a slide
The status bar located at the bottom of the screen displays the slide number
and the name of the slide design
Basic Terms
A presentation is a collection of slides audience handouts and speaker‟s notes all in
one file
Slides are the individual bdquopages‟ or overhead transparencies of the presentation
Slides can have titles text charts drawn objects and clip arts They can be
presented on a screen or as black-and-white transparencies or as colour overhead
transparencies or 35mm slides
A Slide show is a group of slides organised in a specific order or with a specific choice
of paths from one slide to the next
To close MS PowerPoint
1 Click File menu
2 Click Exit
Note that
You can close MS PowerPoint using the shortcut key combination ALT+F4
keys
To open an existing presentation
1 Click Open button
2 Click the drop-down arrow in the Look in field and select the drive andor
folder that contain the presentation to open
3 Double-click the presentation you want to open
Note that
You can open a recently used presentation using the File menu By default
the File menu displays a list of 4 recently used presentations
You can also open a recently used presentation using the New Presentation
task pane In the Open a presentation section click the name of the
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
3
presentation to open If the Task Pane is not visible click View menu and
Task Pane
You can open a presentation workbook using the shortcut key combination
CTRL+O keys
To open other existing presentations repeat steps 1-3
To close an existing presentation
1 Save your work
2 Click File menu
3 Click Close command
Note that
You can close a presentation using the shortcut key combination CTRL+F4
keys
Creating a New Presentation
By default all new presentations are created on a standard (or default) template
Click New button
Note that
You also open a new presentation based on the default
template using the New Presentation task pane In the
New section click Blank Presentation
You can open a new workbook using the shortcut key combination CTRL+N
keys
4
Saving a Presentation
It is important to save your work from time to time whilst typing When you save a
presentation for the first time you need to give it a name Presentation names can
have up to 255 characters including spaces File names cannot include any of the
following characters forward slash () backslash () greater than sign (gt) less than
sign (lt) asterisk () period () question mark () quotation mark () pipe symbol
(|) colon () or semicolon ()
To save a presentation to a location or drive
1 Click Save button
2 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved By default the file will be saved
on Drive C in the My Documents folder
3 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
4 Click Save button
Note that
After you save a file for the first time the filename appears in the title bar
When you save the file the second third fourth time etc the computer will
not ask you to input all this information again but will only update the file with
the changes made up to that moment
You can save a presentation using the shortcut key combination CTRL+S
keys
To save an open presentation under another name
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Repeat steps 2-4 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
5
Saving a Presentation as another File Type
You can save a presentation as another file type Rich Text Format template show
image file format and version number
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved
4 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
5 Click the Save as type drop down arrow
6 Click the file format that you want the file saved in eg PowerPoint 95 (ppt)
7 Click Save button
Note that
The facility to save a presentation to another format can be useful so that this
can be read by previous versions of MS PowerPoint
Switching between Open Presentations
You can switch between two or more open presentations by
4 Click Window menu
5 Click the name of the presentation to display
Note that
To switch between open presentations you can click on the presentation file
button on the task bar (running horizontally across the bottom of the MS
Windows screen)
Modifying User Preferences
You can modify the author‟s name attached to every workbook generated in MS
PowerPoint as follows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Optionshellip The Options dialog box will be displayed
3 In the General tab card type in the appropriate information in the Name field
4 Click OK button
6
You can also set a folder location where all presentations will be saved
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for modifying the user name
2 In the Save tab card in the Default file location field type in the drivefolder
where the presentations will be saved
3 Click OK button
Using Help
1 Click Help menu
2 Click Microsoft PowerPoint Help The office assistant is displayed
3 Type a keyword or question in the Answer Wizard box
4 Click Search button
5 Click the topic to display
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
7
Magnification amp Zoom Tools
The zoom feature allows you to enlarge or reduce the view of a page on
the screen MS PowerPoint offers two ways of zooming ndash the zoom tool
on the standard toolbar and the zoom dialog box in the View menu
1 Click Zoom control button
2 Select the appropriate option At 100 the text and images
are the same size they will be when you print them Below
100 they are smaller Above 100 they are bigger
Note that
You can also type in any percentage value in the zoom textbox
Built-in Toolbars
A toolbar is a rowcolumn of buttonsicons These buttons are used to accomplish
tasks quickly without opening menus By default MS PowerPoint displays three
toolbars - the Standard Formatting and Drawing toolbars The Standard and
Formatting toolbars are displayed on a single row
To display the Standard and Formatting toolbars on two separate rows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Customizehellip The Customize dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Options tab card tick the option Show Standard and Formatting
Toolbars on two rows
4 Click Close button
8
To display additional toolbars
1 Click View menu
2 Select Toolbars
3 Click on the toolbar to put one display The selected toolbar is displayed on
the screen
Toolbars are not fixed to any part of the MS PowerPoint screen ndash they can float
Accordingly you can move toolbars to any part of the screen by dragging them
To move a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Drag the toolbar to any part of the screen
3 Release the mouse button when the toolbar is at the desired location
To turn a fixed toolbar into a floating toolbar
1 Position the mouse pointer on an empty part ie an area without any buttons
of the toolbar to detach
2 Double-click the mouse
To re-attach a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Double-click the mouse
The toolbar moves to its home port at the top or bottom of the screen
To hide a toolbar
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Toolbars A sub-menu displaying available toolbars will be displayed
The toolbars which are currently displayed in MS PowerPoint will have a check
mark
3 Click the check marked toolbar to hide the toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
9
DEVELOPING A PRESENTATION
Changing between Presentation View Modes
You can view MS PowerPoint Presentations in different page display modes
1 Click View menu
2 Select Normal Slide Sorter Notes Pages or Slide Show view
Depending on the task at hand some views are better than others
Option To Do This
Normal Contains three panes the outline pane the slide pane and the notes pane These panes let you work on all aspects of your presentation in one place You can adjust
the size of the different panes by dragging the pane borders
Slide Sorter Displays a miniature version of all the slides in your presentation You can use this to check the consistency of the layout and colour scheme You change the order of slides delete slides add timings and select animated transitions for moving from slide to slide
Notes Pages Used to add the speaker‟s or presenter‟s notes or information to be shared with the audience
Slide Show Used to view slides full-screen (without any menu bars) exactly as they would appear projected To exit from Slide Show view press the ESC key
Note that
You can also switch to different views using the view buttons at the bottom
left corner of the PowerPoint screen
Changing the Slide Layout
During this course you will be using the following slide layouts
Title Slide Title amp Text Title amp 2 Column
Text
Title Only
Title amp Chart Title amp Table Text amp Clip art Organisation
Chart
Slide Sorter View
Normal View Slide Show
10
To change the layout of a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide LayouthellipThe Slide Layout task pane will be displayed
3 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to apply a layout
to
4 In the Slide Layout task pane point to the layout you want and then click it
Note that
If you skip step 3 the formatting will be applied to the current slide
Using Design Templates
You don‟t need to be a professional graphic designer to enhance the presentation of
your slides MS PowerPoint comes with many artist-created templates A template is
a presentation in which the masters and the colours have been especially designed for
a particular bdquolook‟ Templates define what your text will look like and where it will
appear and they offer a complete colour scheme
Using the Slide Design task pane you can preview and apply a design template to
your presentation The template can be applied to all slides or selected slides and you
can apply more than one type of design template in a single presentation
To apply a design template to a presentation
1 Click Slide Design button on the Formatting toolbar The Slide
Design task pane will be displayed
2 Click Design Templates in the Slide Design task pane
3 Click the template you want to apply to all the slides
Note that
To apply a template to a single slide select the thumbnail on the Slides tab in
the task pane point to the template and click the arrow and then click Apply
to Selected Slides
To apply a template to multiple selected slides select the thumbnails on the
Slides tab and in the task pane click the template
The design templates you have applied appear below the Recently Used list in
the Slide Design All available design templates appear under Available for
use
To change between available templates repeat steps 1-3 as above
Changing the Background Colour
You can change the background color of a specific slide or all the slides in the
presentation Changing the background is useful if you want to change the background
to emphasize sections of a presentation Besides changing the color you can add
shading a pattern a texture or a picture
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
11
To change the slide background colour
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Background The Background dialog
box will be displayed
3 Under Background fill click the arrow on
the right of the box and then select the
appropriate option
4 Click Apply button or Apply to All button
Note that
If you click the Apply button the background will be applied only to the active
slide or selected slides
Inserting New Slides
Each time you insert a new slide you will choose a speicific layout depending on the
content of the slide Layout refers to the way content is arranged in a slide A layout
contains placeholders which in turn hold text such as titles and bulleted lists and slide
content such as tables charts pictures shapes and clip art
By default the Title Slide layout will be displayed when you open a new presentation
file This layout contains two placeholders ndash the main title and the subtitle placeholder
To insert a new blank slide do either of the following
1 On the Formatting toolbar click New Slide button
2 In the Slide Layout task pane click the layout you want
Note that
If the insertion point is in the Outline or Slides
tab you can insert a new slide by pressing
Enter key
You can also insert a new slide from the Slide
Layout task pane point to a layout click the
arrow and then click Insert New Slide
If you want to keep the Slide Layout task pane
from displaying each time you click New Slide
clear the Show when inserting new slides
check box at the bottom of the pane
Copying Moving Slides
You can copy an entire slide within the same presentation file
1 Click View menu
2 Click Slide Sorter
3 Click the slide to copy A blue frame will be displayed around the selected
slide
4 Click Copy button
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
2
Features of the MS PowerPoint Screen
MS PowerPoint opens in the Normal view
The title bar shows the name of the presentation PowerPoint assigns your
presentation a temporary name (eg Presentation1) until you save it with the
name you choose
The menu bar is used to choose all commands while working in PowerPoint
The toolbars provide quick access to some of PowerPoint‟s commands without
having to use a pull-down menu
The slide pane displays a large view of the current slide
The notes pane is the area where you type notes that you want to accompany
a slide
The status bar located at the bottom of the screen displays the slide number
and the name of the slide design
Basic Terms
A presentation is a collection of slides audience handouts and speaker‟s notes all in
one file
Slides are the individual bdquopages‟ or overhead transparencies of the presentation
Slides can have titles text charts drawn objects and clip arts They can be
presented on a screen or as black-and-white transparencies or as colour overhead
transparencies or 35mm slides
A Slide show is a group of slides organised in a specific order or with a specific choice
of paths from one slide to the next
To close MS PowerPoint
1 Click File menu
2 Click Exit
Note that
You can close MS PowerPoint using the shortcut key combination ALT+F4
keys
To open an existing presentation
1 Click Open button
2 Click the drop-down arrow in the Look in field and select the drive andor
folder that contain the presentation to open
3 Double-click the presentation you want to open
Note that
You can open a recently used presentation using the File menu By default
the File menu displays a list of 4 recently used presentations
You can also open a recently used presentation using the New Presentation
task pane In the Open a presentation section click the name of the
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
3
presentation to open If the Task Pane is not visible click View menu and
Task Pane
You can open a presentation workbook using the shortcut key combination
CTRL+O keys
To open other existing presentations repeat steps 1-3
To close an existing presentation
1 Save your work
2 Click File menu
3 Click Close command
Note that
You can close a presentation using the shortcut key combination CTRL+F4
keys
Creating a New Presentation
By default all new presentations are created on a standard (or default) template
Click New button
Note that
You also open a new presentation based on the default
template using the New Presentation task pane In the
New section click Blank Presentation
You can open a new workbook using the shortcut key combination CTRL+N
keys
4
Saving a Presentation
It is important to save your work from time to time whilst typing When you save a
presentation for the first time you need to give it a name Presentation names can
have up to 255 characters including spaces File names cannot include any of the
following characters forward slash () backslash () greater than sign (gt) less than
sign (lt) asterisk () period () question mark () quotation mark () pipe symbol
(|) colon () or semicolon ()
To save a presentation to a location or drive
1 Click Save button
2 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved By default the file will be saved
on Drive C in the My Documents folder
3 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
4 Click Save button
Note that
After you save a file for the first time the filename appears in the title bar
When you save the file the second third fourth time etc the computer will
not ask you to input all this information again but will only update the file with
the changes made up to that moment
You can save a presentation using the shortcut key combination CTRL+S
keys
To save an open presentation under another name
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Repeat steps 2-4 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
5
Saving a Presentation as another File Type
You can save a presentation as another file type Rich Text Format template show
image file format and version number
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved
4 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
5 Click the Save as type drop down arrow
6 Click the file format that you want the file saved in eg PowerPoint 95 (ppt)
7 Click Save button
Note that
The facility to save a presentation to another format can be useful so that this
can be read by previous versions of MS PowerPoint
Switching between Open Presentations
You can switch between two or more open presentations by
4 Click Window menu
5 Click the name of the presentation to display
Note that
To switch between open presentations you can click on the presentation file
button on the task bar (running horizontally across the bottom of the MS
Windows screen)
Modifying User Preferences
You can modify the author‟s name attached to every workbook generated in MS
PowerPoint as follows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Optionshellip The Options dialog box will be displayed
3 In the General tab card type in the appropriate information in the Name field
4 Click OK button
6
You can also set a folder location where all presentations will be saved
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for modifying the user name
2 In the Save tab card in the Default file location field type in the drivefolder
where the presentations will be saved
3 Click OK button
Using Help
1 Click Help menu
2 Click Microsoft PowerPoint Help The office assistant is displayed
3 Type a keyword or question in the Answer Wizard box
4 Click Search button
5 Click the topic to display
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
7
Magnification amp Zoom Tools
The zoom feature allows you to enlarge or reduce the view of a page on
the screen MS PowerPoint offers two ways of zooming ndash the zoom tool
on the standard toolbar and the zoom dialog box in the View menu
1 Click Zoom control button
2 Select the appropriate option At 100 the text and images
are the same size they will be when you print them Below
100 they are smaller Above 100 they are bigger
Note that
You can also type in any percentage value in the zoom textbox
Built-in Toolbars
A toolbar is a rowcolumn of buttonsicons These buttons are used to accomplish
tasks quickly without opening menus By default MS PowerPoint displays three
toolbars - the Standard Formatting and Drawing toolbars The Standard and
Formatting toolbars are displayed on a single row
To display the Standard and Formatting toolbars on two separate rows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Customizehellip The Customize dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Options tab card tick the option Show Standard and Formatting
Toolbars on two rows
4 Click Close button
8
To display additional toolbars
1 Click View menu
2 Select Toolbars
3 Click on the toolbar to put one display The selected toolbar is displayed on
the screen
Toolbars are not fixed to any part of the MS PowerPoint screen ndash they can float
Accordingly you can move toolbars to any part of the screen by dragging them
To move a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Drag the toolbar to any part of the screen
3 Release the mouse button when the toolbar is at the desired location
To turn a fixed toolbar into a floating toolbar
1 Position the mouse pointer on an empty part ie an area without any buttons
of the toolbar to detach
2 Double-click the mouse
To re-attach a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Double-click the mouse
The toolbar moves to its home port at the top or bottom of the screen
To hide a toolbar
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Toolbars A sub-menu displaying available toolbars will be displayed
The toolbars which are currently displayed in MS PowerPoint will have a check
mark
3 Click the check marked toolbar to hide the toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
9
DEVELOPING A PRESENTATION
Changing between Presentation View Modes
You can view MS PowerPoint Presentations in different page display modes
1 Click View menu
2 Select Normal Slide Sorter Notes Pages or Slide Show view
Depending on the task at hand some views are better than others
Option To Do This
Normal Contains three panes the outline pane the slide pane and the notes pane These panes let you work on all aspects of your presentation in one place You can adjust
the size of the different panes by dragging the pane borders
Slide Sorter Displays a miniature version of all the slides in your presentation You can use this to check the consistency of the layout and colour scheme You change the order of slides delete slides add timings and select animated transitions for moving from slide to slide
Notes Pages Used to add the speaker‟s or presenter‟s notes or information to be shared with the audience
Slide Show Used to view slides full-screen (without any menu bars) exactly as they would appear projected To exit from Slide Show view press the ESC key
Note that
You can also switch to different views using the view buttons at the bottom
left corner of the PowerPoint screen
Changing the Slide Layout
During this course you will be using the following slide layouts
Title Slide Title amp Text Title amp 2 Column
Text
Title Only
Title amp Chart Title amp Table Text amp Clip art Organisation
Chart
Slide Sorter View
Normal View Slide Show
10
To change the layout of a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide LayouthellipThe Slide Layout task pane will be displayed
3 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to apply a layout
to
4 In the Slide Layout task pane point to the layout you want and then click it
Note that
If you skip step 3 the formatting will be applied to the current slide
Using Design Templates
You don‟t need to be a professional graphic designer to enhance the presentation of
your slides MS PowerPoint comes with many artist-created templates A template is
a presentation in which the masters and the colours have been especially designed for
a particular bdquolook‟ Templates define what your text will look like and where it will
appear and they offer a complete colour scheme
Using the Slide Design task pane you can preview and apply a design template to
your presentation The template can be applied to all slides or selected slides and you
can apply more than one type of design template in a single presentation
To apply a design template to a presentation
1 Click Slide Design button on the Formatting toolbar The Slide
Design task pane will be displayed
2 Click Design Templates in the Slide Design task pane
3 Click the template you want to apply to all the slides
Note that
To apply a template to a single slide select the thumbnail on the Slides tab in
the task pane point to the template and click the arrow and then click Apply
to Selected Slides
To apply a template to multiple selected slides select the thumbnails on the
Slides tab and in the task pane click the template
The design templates you have applied appear below the Recently Used list in
the Slide Design All available design templates appear under Available for
use
To change between available templates repeat steps 1-3 as above
Changing the Background Colour
You can change the background color of a specific slide or all the slides in the
presentation Changing the background is useful if you want to change the background
to emphasize sections of a presentation Besides changing the color you can add
shading a pattern a texture or a picture
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
11
To change the slide background colour
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Background The Background dialog
box will be displayed
3 Under Background fill click the arrow on
the right of the box and then select the
appropriate option
4 Click Apply button or Apply to All button
Note that
If you click the Apply button the background will be applied only to the active
slide or selected slides
Inserting New Slides
Each time you insert a new slide you will choose a speicific layout depending on the
content of the slide Layout refers to the way content is arranged in a slide A layout
contains placeholders which in turn hold text such as titles and bulleted lists and slide
content such as tables charts pictures shapes and clip art
By default the Title Slide layout will be displayed when you open a new presentation
file This layout contains two placeholders ndash the main title and the subtitle placeholder
To insert a new blank slide do either of the following
1 On the Formatting toolbar click New Slide button
2 In the Slide Layout task pane click the layout you want
Note that
If the insertion point is in the Outline or Slides
tab you can insert a new slide by pressing
Enter key
You can also insert a new slide from the Slide
Layout task pane point to a layout click the
arrow and then click Insert New Slide
If you want to keep the Slide Layout task pane
from displaying each time you click New Slide
clear the Show when inserting new slides
check box at the bottom of the pane
Copying Moving Slides
You can copy an entire slide within the same presentation file
1 Click View menu
2 Click Slide Sorter
3 Click the slide to copy A blue frame will be displayed around the selected
slide
4 Click Copy button
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
3
presentation to open If the Task Pane is not visible click View menu and
Task Pane
You can open a presentation workbook using the shortcut key combination
CTRL+O keys
To open other existing presentations repeat steps 1-3
To close an existing presentation
1 Save your work
2 Click File menu
3 Click Close command
Note that
You can close a presentation using the shortcut key combination CTRL+F4
keys
Creating a New Presentation
By default all new presentations are created on a standard (or default) template
Click New button
Note that
You also open a new presentation based on the default
template using the New Presentation task pane In the
New section click Blank Presentation
You can open a new workbook using the shortcut key combination CTRL+N
keys
4
Saving a Presentation
It is important to save your work from time to time whilst typing When you save a
presentation for the first time you need to give it a name Presentation names can
have up to 255 characters including spaces File names cannot include any of the
following characters forward slash () backslash () greater than sign (gt) less than
sign (lt) asterisk () period () question mark () quotation mark () pipe symbol
(|) colon () or semicolon ()
To save a presentation to a location or drive
1 Click Save button
2 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved By default the file will be saved
on Drive C in the My Documents folder
3 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
4 Click Save button
Note that
After you save a file for the first time the filename appears in the title bar
When you save the file the second third fourth time etc the computer will
not ask you to input all this information again but will only update the file with
the changes made up to that moment
You can save a presentation using the shortcut key combination CTRL+S
keys
To save an open presentation under another name
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Repeat steps 2-4 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
5
Saving a Presentation as another File Type
You can save a presentation as another file type Rich Text Format template show
image file format and version number
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved
4 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
5 Click the Save as type drop down arrow
6 Click the file format that you want the file saved in eg PowerPoint 95 (ppt)
7 Click Save button
Note that
The facility to save a presentation to another format can be useful so that this
can be read by previous versions of MS PowerPoint
Switching between Open Presentations
You can switch between two or more open presentations by
4 Click Window menu
5 Click the name of the presentation to display
Note that
To switch between open presentations you can click on the presentation file
button on the task bar (running horizontally across the bottom of the MS
Windows screen)
Modifying User Preferences
You can modify the author‟s name attached to every workbook generated in MS
PowerPoint as follows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Optionshellip The Options dialog box will be displayed
3 In the General tab card type in the appropriate information in the Name field
4 Click OK button
6
You can also set a folder location where all presentations will be saved
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for modifying the user name
2 In the Save tab card in the Default file location field type in the drivefolder
where the presentations will be saved
3 Click OK button
Using Help
1 Click Help menu
2 Click Microsoft PowerPoint Help The office assistant is displayed
3 Type a keyword or question in the Answer Wizard box
4 Click Search button
5 Click the topic to display
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
7
Magnification amp Zoom Tools
The zoom feature allows you to enlarge or reduce the view of a page on
the screen MS PowerPoint offers two ways of zooming ndash the zoom tool
on the standard toolbar and the zoom dialog box in the View menu
1 Click Zoom control button
2 Select the appropriate option At 100 the text and images
are the same size they will be when you print them Below
100 they are smaller Above 100 they are bigger
Note that
You can also type in any percentage value in the zoom textbox
Built-in Toolbars
A toolbar is a rowcolumn of buttonsicons These buttons are used to accomplish
tasks quickly without opening menus By default MS PowerPoint displays three
toolbars - the Standard Formatting and Drawing toolbars The Standard and
Formatting toolbars are displayed on a single row
To display the Standard and Formatting toolbars on two separate rows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Customizehellip The Customize dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Options tab card tick the option Show Standard and Formatting
Toolbars on two rows
4 Click Close button
8
To display additional toolbars
1 Click View menu
2 Select Toolbars
3 Click on the toolbar to put one display The selected toolbar is displayed on
the screen
Toolbars are not fixed to any part of the MS PowerPoint screen ndash they can float
Accordingly you can move toolbars to any part of the screen by dragging them
To move a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Drag the toolbar to any part of the screen
3 Release the mouse button when the toolbar is at the desired location
To turn a fixed toolbar into a floating toolbar
1 Position the mouse pointer on an empty part ie an area without any buttons
of the toolbar to detach
2 Double-click the mouse
To re-attach a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Double-click the mouse
The toolbar moves to its home port at the top or bottom of the screen
To hide a toolbar
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Toolbars A sub-menu displaying available toolbars will be displayed
The toolbars which are currently displayed in MS PowerPoint will have a check
mark
3 Click the check marked toolbar to hide the toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
9
DEVELOPING A PRESENTATION
Changing between Presentation View Modes
You can view MS PowerPoint Presentations in different page display modes
1 Click View menu
2 Select Normal Slide Sorter Notes Pages or Slide Show view
Depending on the task at hand some views are better than others
Option To Do This
Normal Contains three panes the outline pane the slide pane and the notes pane These panes let you work on all aspects of your presentation in one place You can adjust
the size of the different panes by dragging the pane borders
Slide Sorter Displays a miniature version of all the slides in your presentation You can use this to check the consistency of the layout and colour scheme You change the order of slides delete slides add timings and select animated transitions for moving from slide to slide
Notes Pages Used to add the speaker‟s or presenter‟s notes or information to be shared with the audience
Slide Show Used to view slides full-screen (without any menu bars) exactly as they would appear projected To exit from Slide Show view press the ESC key
Note that
You can also switch to different views using the view buttons at the bottom
left corner of the PowerPoint screen
Changing the Slide Layout
During this course you will be using the following slide layouts
Title Slide Title amp Text Title amp 2 Column
Text
Title Only
Title amp Chart Title amp Table Text amp Clip art Organisation
Chart
Slide Sorter View
Normal View Slide Show
10
To change the layout of a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide LayouthellipThe Slide Layout task pane will be displayed
3 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to apply a layout
to
4 In the Slide Layout task pane point to the layout you want and then click it
Note that
If you skip step 3 the formatting will be applied to the current slide
Using Design Templates
You don‟t need to be a professional graphic designer to enhance the presentation of
your slides MS PowerPoint comes with many artist-created templates A template is
a presentation in which the masters and the colours have been especially designed for
a particular bdquolook‟ Templates define what your text will look like and where it will
appear and they offer a complete colour scheme
Using the Slide Design task pane you can preview and apply a design template to
your presentation The template can be applied to all slides or selected slides and you
can apply more than one type of design template in a single presentation
To apply a design template to a presentation
1 Click Slide Design button on the Formatting toolbar The Slide
Design task pane will be displayed
2 Click Design Templates in the Slide Design task pane
3 Click the template you want to apply to all the slides
Note that
To apply a template to a single slide select the thumbnail on the Slides tab in
the task pane point to the template and click the arrow and then click Apply
to Selected Slides
To apply a template to multiple selected slides select the thumbnails on the
Slides tab and in the task pane click the template
The design templates you have applied appear below the Recently Used list in
the Slide Design All available design templates appear under Available for
use
To change between available templates repeat steps 1-3 as above
Changing the Background Colour
You can change the background color of a specific slide or all the slides in the
presentation Changing the background is useful if you want to change the background
to emphasize sections of a presentation Besides changing the color you can add
shading a pattern a texture or a picture
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
11
To change the slide background colour
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Background The Background dialog
box will be displayed
3 Under Background fill click the arrow on
the right of the box and then select the
appropriate option
4 Click Apply button or Apply to All button
Note that
If you click the Apply button the background will be applied only to the active
slide or selected slides
Inserting New Slides
Each time you insert a new slide you will choose a speicific layout depending on the
content of the slide Layout refers to the way content is arranged in a slide A layout
contains placeholders which in turn hold text such as titles and bulleted lists and slide
content such as tables charts pictures shapes and clip art
By default the Title Slide layout will be displayed when you open a new presentation
file This layout contains two placeholders ndash the main title and the subtitle placeholder
To insert a new blank slide do either of the following
1 On the Formatting toolbar click New Slide button
2 In the Slide Layout task pane click the layout you want
Note that
If the insertion point is in the Outline or Slides
tab you can insert a new slide by pressing
Enter key
You can also insert a new slide from the Slide
Layout task pane point to a layout click the
arrow and then click Insert New Slide
If you want to keep the Slide Layout task pane
from displaying each time you click New Slide
clear the Show when inserting new slides
check box at the bottom of the pane
Copying Moving Slides
You can copy an entire slide within the same presentation file
1 Click View menu
2 Click Slide Sorter
3 Click the slide to copy A blue frame will be displayed around the selected
slide
4 Click Copy button
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
4
Saving a Presentation
It is important to save your work from time to time whilst typing When you save a
presentation for the first time you need to give it a name Presentation names can
have up to 255 characters including spaces File names cannot include any of the
following characters forward slash () backslash () greater than sign (gt) less than
sign (lt) asterisk () period () question mark () quotation mark () pipe symbol
(|) colon () or semicolon ()
To save a presentation to a location or drive
1 Click Save button
2 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved By default the file will be saved
on Drive C in the My Documents folder
3 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
4 Click Save button
Note that
After you save a file for the first time the filename appears in the title bar
When you save the file the second third fourth time etc the computer will
not ask you to input all this information again but will only update the file with
the changes made up to that moment
You can save a presentation using the shortcut key combination CTRL+S
keys
To save an open presentation under another name
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Repeat steps 2-4 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
5
Saving a Presentation as another File Type
You can save a presentation as another file type Rich Text Format template show
image file format and version number
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved
4 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
5 Click the Save as type drop down arrow
6 Click the file format that you want the file saved in eg PowerPoint 95 (ppt)
7 Click Save button
Note that
The facility to save a presentation to another format can be useful so that this
can be read by previous versions of MS PowerPoint
Switching between Open Presentations
You can switch between two or more open presentations by
4 Click Window menu
5 Click the name of the presentation to display
Note that
To switch between open presentations you can click on the presentation file
button on the task bar (running horizontally across the bottom of the MS
Windows screen)
Modifying User Preferences
You can modify the author‟s name attached to every workbook generated in MS
PowerPoint as follows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Optionshellip The Options dialog box will be displayed
3 In the General tab card type in the appropriate information in the Name field
4 Click OK button
6
You can also set a folder location where all presentations will be saved
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for modifying the user name
2 In the Save tab card in the Default file location field type in the drivefolder
where the presentations will be saved
3 Click OK button
Using Help
1 Click Help menu
2 Click Microsoft PowerPoint Help The office assistant is displayed
3 Type a keyword or question in the Answer Wizard box
4 Click Search button
5 Click the topic to display
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
7
Magnification amp Zoom Tools
The zoom feature allows you to enlarge or reduce the view of a page on
the screen MS PowerPoint offers two ways of zooming ndash the zoom tool
on the standard toolbar and the zoom dialog box in the View menu
1 Click Zoom control button
2 Select the appropriate option At 100 the text and images
are the same size they will be when you print them Below
100 they are smaller Above 100 they are bigger
Note that
You can also type in any percentage value in the zoom textbox
Built-in Toolbars
A toolbar is a rowcolumn of buttonsicons These buttons are used to accomplish
tasks quickly without opening menus By default MS PowerPoint displays three
toolbars - the Standard Formatting and Drawing toolbars The Standard and
Formatting toolbars are displayed on a single row
To display the Standard and Formatting toolbars on two separate rows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Customizehellip The Customize dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Options tab card tick the option Show Standard and Formatting
Toolbars on two rows
4 Click Close button
8
To display additional toolbars
1 Click View menu
2 Select Toolbars
3 Click on the toolbar to put one display The selected toolbar is displayed on
the screen
Toolbars are not fixed to any part of the MS PowerPoint screen ndash they can float
Accordingly you can move toolbars to any part of the screen by dragging them
To move a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Drag the toolbar to any part of the screen
3 Release the mouse button when the toolbar is at the desired location
To turn a fixed toolbar into a floating toolbar
1 Position the mouse pointer on an empty part ie an area without any buttons
of the toolbar to detach
2 Double-click the mouse
To re-attach a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Double-click the mouse
The toolbar moves to its home port at the top or bottom of the screen
To hide a toolbar
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Toolbars A sub-menu displaying available toolbars will be displayed
The toolbars which are currently displayed in MS PowerPoint will have a check
mark
3 Click the check marked toolbar to hide the toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
9
DEVELOPING A PRESENTATION
Changing between Presentation View Modes
You can view MS PowerPoint Presentations in different page display modes
1 Click View menu
2 Select Normal Slide Sorter Notes Pages or Slide Show view
Depending on the task at hand some views are better than others
Option To Do This
Normal Contains three panes the outline pane the slide pane and the notes pane These panes let you work on all aspects of your presentation in one place You can adjust
the size of the different panes by dragging the pane borders
Slide Sorter Displays a miniature version of all the slides in your presentation You can use this to check the consistency of the layout and colour scheme You change the order of slides delete slides add timings and select animated transitions for moving from slide to slide
Notes Pages Used to add the speaker‟s or presenter‟s notes or information to be shared with the audience
Slide Show Used to view slides full-screen (without any menu bars) exactly as they would appear projected To exit from Slide Show view press the ESC key
Note that
You can also switch to different views using the view buttons at the bottom
left corner of the PowerPoint screen
Changing the Slide Layout
During this course you will be using the following slide layouts
Title Slide Title amp Text Title amp 2 Column
Text
Title Only
Title amp Chart Title amp Table Text amp Clip art Organisation
Chart
Slide Sorter View
Normal View Slide Show
10
To change the layout of a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide LayouthellipThe Slide Layout task pane will be displayed
3 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to apply a layout
to
4 In the Slide Layout task pane point to the layout you want and then click it
Note that
If you skip step 3 the formatting will be applied to the current slide
Using Design Templates
You don‟t need to be a professional graphic designer to enhance the presentation of
your slides MS PowerPoint comes with many artist-created templates A template is
a presentation in which the masters and the colours have been especially designed for
a particular bdquolook‟ Templates define what your text will look like and where it will
appear and they offer a complete colour scheme
Using the Slide Design task pane you can preview and apply a design template to
your presentation The template can be applied to all slides or selected slides and you
can apply more than one type of design template in a single presentation
To apply a design template to a presentation
1 Click Slide Design button on the Formatting toolbar The Slide
Design task pane will be displayed
2 Click Design Templates in the Slide Design task pane
3 Click the template you want to apply to all the slides
Note that
To apply a template to a single slide select the thumbnail on the Slides tab in
the task pane point to the template and click the arrow and then click Apply
to Selected Slides
To apply a template to multiple selected slides select the thumbnails on the
Slides tab and in the task pane click the template
The design templates you have applied appear below the Recently Used list in
the Slide Design All available design templates appear under Available for
use
To change between available templates repeat steps 1-3 as above
Changing the Background Colour
You can change the background color of a specific slide or all the slides in the
presentation Changing the background is useful if you want to change the background
to emphasize sections of a presentation Besides changing the color you can add
shading a pattern a texture or a picture
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
11
To change the slide background colour
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Background The Background dialog
box will be displayed
3 Under Background fill click the arrow on
the right of the box and then select the
appropriate option
4 Click Apply button or Apply to All button
Note that
If you click the Apply button the background will be applied only to the active
slide or selected slides
Inserting New Slides
Each time you insert a new slide you will choose a speicific layout depending on the
content of the slide Layout refers to the way content is arranged in a slide A layout
contains placeholders which in turn hold text such as titles and bulleted lists and slide
content such as tables charts pictures shapes and clip art
By default the Title Slide layout will be displayed when you open a new presentation
file This layout contains two placeholders ndash the main title and the subtitle placeholder
To insert a new blank slide do either of the following
1 On the Formatting toolbar click New Slide button
2 In the Slide Layout task pane click the layout you want
Note that
If the insertion point is in the Outline or Slides
tab you can insert a new slide by pressing
Enter key
You can also insert a new slide from the Slide
Layout task pane point to a layout click the
arrow and then click Insert New Slide
If you want to keep the Slide Layout task pane
from displaying each time you click New Slide
clear the Show when inserting new slides
check box at the bottom of the pane
Copying Moving Slides
You can copy an entire slide within the same presentation file
1 Click View menu
2 Click Slide Sorter
3 Click the slide to copy A blue frame will be displayed around the selected
slide
4 Click Copy button
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
5
Saving a Presentation as another File Type
You can save a presentation as another file type Rich Text Format template show
image file format and version number
1 Click File menu
2 Click Save Ashellip The Save As dialog box will be displayed
3 Click the drop-down arrow in the Save in field and select the disk andor
folder where the presentation will be saved
4 Type a name for your presentation in the File name field
5 Click the Save as type drop down arrow
6 Click the file format that you want the file saved in eg PowerPoint 95 (ppt)
7 Click Save button
Note that
The facility to save a presentation to another format can be useful so that this
can be read by previous versions of MS PowerPoint
Switching between Open Presentations
You can switch between two or more open presentations by
4 Click Window menu
5 Click the name of the presentation to display
Note that
To switch between open presentations you can click on the presentation file
button on the task bar (running horizontally across the bottom of the MS
Windows screen)
Modifying User Preferences
You can modify the author‟s name attached to every workbook generated in MS
PowerPoint as follows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Optionshellip The Options dialog box will be displayed
3 In the General tab card type in the appropriate information in the Name field
4 Click OK button
6
You can also set a folder location where all presentations will be saved
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for modifying the user name
2 In the Save tab card in the Default file location field type in the drivefolder
where the presentations will be saved
3 Click OK button
Using Help
1 Click Help menu
2 Click Microsoft PowerPoint Help The office assistant is displayed
3 Type a keyword or question in the Answer Wizard box
4 Click Search button
5 Click the topic to display
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
7
Magnification amp Zoom Tools
The zoom feature allows you to enlarge or reduce the view of a page on
the screen MS PowerPoint offers two ways of zooming ndash the zoom tool
on the standard toolbar and the zoom dialog box in the View menu
1 Click Zoom control button
2 Select the appropriate option At 100 the text and images
are the same size they will be when you print them Below
100 they are smaller Above 100 they are bigger
Note that
You can also type in any percentage value in the zoom textbox
Built-in Toolbars
A toolbar is a rowcolumn of buttonsicons These buttons are used to accomplish
tasks quickly without opening menus By default MS PowerPoint displays three
toolbars - the Standard Formatting and Drawing toolbars The Standard and
Formatting toolbars are displayed on a single row
To display the Standard and Formatting toolbars on two separate rows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Customizehellip The Customize dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Options tab card tick the option Show Standard and Formatting
Toolbars on two rows
4 Click Close button
8
To display additional toolbars
1 Click View menu
2 Select Toolbars
3 Click on the toolbar to put one display The selected toolbar is displayed on
the screen
Toolbars are not fixed to any part of the MS PowerPoint screen ndash they can float
Accordingly you can move toolbars to any part of the screen by dragging them
To move a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Drag the toolbar to any part of the screen
3 Release the mouse button when the toolbar is at the desired location
To turn a fixed toolbar into a floating toolbar
1 Position the mouse pointer on an empty part ie an area without any buttons
of the toolbar to detach
2 Double-click the mouse
To re-attach a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Double-click the mouse
The toolbar moves to its home port at the top or bottom of the screen
To hide a toolbar
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Toolbars A sub-menu displaying available toolbars will be displayed
The toolbars which are currently displayed in MS PowerPoint will have a check
mark
3 Click the check marked toolbar to hide the toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
9
DEVELOPING A PRESENTATION
Changing between Presentation View Modes
You can view MS PowerPoint Presentations in different page display modes
1 Click View menu
2 Select Normal Slide Sorter Notes Pages or Slide Show view
Depending on the task at hand some views are better than others
Option To Do This
Normal Contains three panes the outline pane the slide pane and the notes pane These panes let you work on all aspects of your presentation in one place You can adjust
the size of the different panes by dragging the pane borders
Slide Sorter Displays a miniature version of all the slides in your presentation You can use this to check the consistency of the layout and colour scheme You change the order of slides delete slides add timings and select animated transitions for moving from slide to slide
Notes Pages Used to add the speaker‟s or presenter‟s notes or information to be shared with the audience
Slide Show Used to view slides full-screen (without any menu bars) exactly as they would appear projected To exit from Slide Show view press the ESC key
Note that
You can also switch to different views using the view buttons at the bottom
left corner of the PowerPoint screen
Changing the Slide Layout
During this course you will be using the following slide layouts
Title Slide Title amp Text Title amp 2 Column
Text
Title Only
Title amp Chart Title amp Table Text amp Clip art Organisation
Chart
Slide Sorter View
Normal View Slide Show
10
To change the layout of a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide LayouthellipThe Slide Layout task pane will be displayed
3 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to apply a layout
to
4 In the Slide Layout task pane point to the layout you want and then click it
Note that
If you skip step 3 the formatting will be applied to the current slide
Using Design Templates
You don‟t need to be a professional graphic designer to enhance the presentation of
your slides MS PowerPoint comes with many artist-created templates A template is
a presentation in which the masters and the colours have been especially designed for
a particular bdquolook‟ Templates define what your text will look like and where it will
appear and they offer a complete colour scheme
Using the Slide Design task pane you can preview and apply a design template to
your presentation The template can be applied to all slides or selected slides and you
can apply more than one type of design template in a single presentation
To apply a design template to a presentation
1 Click Slide Design button on the Formatting toolbar The Slide
Design task pane will be displayed
2 Click Design Templates in the Slide Design task pane
3 Click the template you want to apply to all the slides
Note that
To apply a template to a single slide select the thumbnail on the Slides tab in
the task pane point to the template and click the arrow and then click Apply
to Selected Slides
To apply a template to multiple selected slides select the thumbnails on the
Slides tab and in the task pane click the template
The design templates you have applied appear below the Recently Used list in
the Slide Design All available design templates appear under Available for
use
To change between available templates repeat steps 1-3 as above
Changing the Background Colour
You can change the background color of a specific slide or all the slides in the
presentation Changing the background is useful if you want to change the background
to emphasize sections of a presentation Besides changing the color you can add
shading a pattern a texture or a picture
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
11
To change the slide background colour
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Background The Background dialog
box will be displayed
3 Under Background fill click the arrow on
the right of the box and then select the
appropriate option
4 Click Apply button or Apply to All button
Note that
If you click the Apply button the background will be applied only to the active
slide or selected slides
Inserting New Slides
Each time you insert a new slide you will choose a speicific layout depending on the
content of the slide Layout refers to the way content is arranged in a slide A layout
contains placeholders which in turn hold text such as titles and bulleted lists and slide
content such as tables charts pictures shapes and clip art
By default the Title Slide layout will be displayed when you open a new presentation
file This layout contains two placeholders ndash the main title and the subtitle placeholder
To insert a new blank slide do either of the following
1 On the Formatting toolbar click New Slide button
2 In the Slide Layout task pane click the layout you want
Note that
If the insertion point is in the Outline or Slides
tab you can insert a new slide by pressing
Enter key
You can also insert a new slide from the Slide
Layout task pane point to a layout click the
arrow and then click Insert New Slide
If you want to keep the Slide Layout task pane
from displaying each time you click New Slide
clear the Show when inserting new slides
check box at the bottom of the pane
Copying Moving Slides
You can copy an entire slide within the same presentation file
1 Click View menu
2 Click Slide Sorter
3 Click the slide to copy A blue frame will be displayed around the selected
slide
4 Click Copy button
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
6
You can also set a folder location where all presentations will be saved
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for modifying the user name
2 In the Save tab card in the Default file location field type in the drivefolder
where the presentations will be saved
3 Click OK button
Using Help
1 Click Help menu
2 Click Microsoft PowerPoint Help The office assistant is displayed
3 Type a keyword or question in the Answer Wizard box
4 Click Search button
5 Click the topic to display
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
7
Magnification amp Zoom Tools
The zoom feature allows you to enlarge or reduce the view of a page on
the screen MS PowerPoint offers two ways of zooming ndash the zoom tool
on the standard toolbar and the zoom dialog box in the View menu
1 Click Zoom control button
2 Select the appropriate option At 100 the text and images
are the same size they will be when you print them Below
100 they are smaller Above 100 they are bigger
Note that
You can also type in any percentage value in the zoom textbox
Built-in Toolbars
A toolbar is a rowcolumn of buttonsicons These buttons are used to accomplish
tasks quickly without opening menus By default MS PowerPoint displays three
toolbars - the Standard Formatting and Drawing toolbars The Standard and
Formatting toolbars are displayed on a single row
To display the Standard and Formatting toolbars on two separate rows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Customizehellip The Customize dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Options tab card tick the option Show Standard and Formatting
Toolbars on two rows
4 Click Close button
8
To display additional toolbars
1 Click View menu
2 Select Toolbars
3 Click on the toolbar to put one display The selected toolbar is displayed on
the screen
Toolbars are not fixed to any part of the MS PowerPoint screen ndash they can float
Accordingly you can move toolbars to any part of the screen by dragging them
To move a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Drag the toolbar to any part of the screen
3 Release the mouse button when the toolbar is at the desired location
To turn a fixed toolbar into a floating toolbar
1 Position the mouse pointer on an empty part ie an area without any buttons
of the toolbar to detach
2 Double-click the mouse
To re-attach a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Double-click the mouse
The toolbar moves to its home port at the top or bottom of the screen
To hide a toolbar
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Toolbars A sub-menu displaying available toolbars will be displayed
The toolbars which are currently displayed in MS PowerPoint will have a check
mark
3 Click the check marked toolbar to hide the toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
9
DEVELOPING A PRESENTATION
Changing between Presentation View Modes
You can view MS PowerPoint Presentations in different page display modes
1 Click View menu
2 Select Normal Slide Sorter Notes Pages or Slide Show view
Depending on the task at hand some views are better than others
Option To Do This
Normal Contains three panes the outline pane the slide pane and the notes pane These panes let you work on all aspects of your presentation in one place You can adjust
the size of the different panes by dragging the pane borders
Slide Sorter Displays a miniature version of all the slides in your presentation You can use this to check the consistency of the layout and colour scheme You change the order of slides delete slides add timings and select animated transitions for moving from slide to slide
Notes Pages Used to add the speaker‟s or presenter‟s notes or information to be shared with the audience
Slide Show Used to view slides full-screen (without any menu bars) exactly as they would appear projected To exit from Slide Show view press the ESC key
Note that
You can also switch to different views using the view buttons at the bottom
left corner of the PowerPoint screen
Changing the Slide Layout
During this course you will be using the following slide layouts
Title Slide Title amp Text Title amp 2 Column
Text
Title Only
Title amp Chart Title amp Table Text amp Clip art Organisation
Chart
Slide Sorter View
Normal View Slide Show
10
To change the layout of a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide LayouthellipThe Slide Layout task pane will be displayed
3 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to apply a layout
to
4 In the Slide Layout task pane point to the layout you want and then click it
Note that
If you skip step 3 the formatting will be applied to the current slide
Using Design Templates
You don‟t need to be a professional graphic designer to enhance the presentation of
your slides MS PowerPoint comes with many artist-created templates A template is
a presentation in which the masters and the colours have been especially designed for
a particular bdquolook‟ Templates define what your text will look like and where it will
appear and they offer a complete colour scheme
Using the Slide Design task pane you can preview and apply a design template to
your presentation The template can be applied to all slides or selected slides and you
can apply more than one type of design template in a single presentation
To apply a design template to a presentation
1 Click Slide Design button on the Formatting toolbar The Slide
Design task pane will be displayed
2 Click Design Templates in the Slide Design task pane
3 Click the template you want to apply to all the slides
Note that
To apply a template to a single slide select the thumbnail on the Slides tab in
the task pane point to the template and click the arrow and then click Apply
to Selected Slides
To apply a template to multiple selected slides select the thumbnails on the
Slides tab and in the task pane click the template
The design templates you have applied appear below the Recently Used list in
the Slide Design All available design templates appear under Available for
use
To change between available templates repeat steps 1-3 as above
Changing the Background Colour
You can change the background color of a specific slide or all the slides in the
presentation Changing the background is useful if you want to change the background
to emphasize sections of a presentation Besides changing the color you can add
shading a pattern a texture or a picture
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
11
To change the slide background colour
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Background The Background dialog
box will be displayed
3 Under Background fill click the arrow on
the right of the box and then select the
appropriate option
4 Click Apply button or Apply to All button
Note that
If you click the Apply button the background will be applied only to the active
slide or selected slides
Inserting New Slides
Each time you insert a new slide you will choose a speicific layout depending on the
content of the slide Layout refers to the way content is arranged in a slide A layout
contains placeholders which in turn hold text such as titles and bulleted lists and slide
content such as tables charts pictures shapes and clip art
By default the Title Slide layout will be displayed when you open a new presentation
file This layout contains two placeholders ndash the main title and the subtitle placeholder
To insert a new blank slide do either of the following
1 On the Formatting toolbar click New Slide button
2 In the Slide Layout task pane click the layout you want
Note that
If the insertion point is in the Outline or Slides
tab you can insert a new slide by pressing
Enter key
You can also insert a new slide from the Slide
Layout task pane point to a layout click the
arrow and then click Insert New Slide
If you want to keep the Slide Layout task pane
from displaying each time you click New Slide
clear the Show when inserting new slides
check box at the bottom of the pane
Copying Moving Slides
You can copy an entire slide within the same presentation file
1 Click View menu
2 Click Slide Sorter
3 Click the slide to copy A blue frame will be displayed around the selected
slide
4 Click Copy button
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
7
Magnification amp Zoom Tools
The zoom feature allows you to enlarge or reduce the view of a page on
the screen MS PowerPoint offers two ways of zooming ndash the zoom tool
on the standard toolbar and the zoom dialog box in the View menu
1 Click Zoom control button
2 Select the appropriate option At 100 the text and images
are the same size they will be when you print them Below
100 they are smaller Above 100 they are bigger
Note that
You can also type in any percentage value in the zoom textbox
Built-in Toolbars
A toolbar is a rowcolumn of buttonsicons These buttons are used to accomplish
tasks quickly without opening menus By default MS PowerPoint displays three
toolbars - the Standard Formatting and Drawing toolbars The Standard and
Formatting toolbars are displayed on a single row
To display the Standard and Formatting toolbars on two separate rows
1 Click Tools menu
2 Click Customizehellip The Customize dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Options tab card tick the option Show Standard and Formatting
Toolbars on two rows
4 Click Close button
8
To display additional toolbars
1 Click View menu
2 Select Toolbars
3 Click on the toolbar to put one display The selected toolbar is displayed on
the screen
Toolbars are not fixed to any part of the MS PowerPoint screen ndash they can float
Accordingly you can move toolbars to any part of the screen by dragging them
To move a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Drag the toolbar to any part of the screen
3 Release the mouse button when the toolbar is at the desired location
To turn a fixed toolbar into a floating toolbar
1 Position the mouse pointer on an empty part ie an area without any buttons
of the toolbar to detach
2 Double-click the mouse
To re-attach a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Double-click the mouse
The toolbar moves to its home port at the top or bottom of the screen
To hide a toolbar
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Toolbars A sub-menu displaying available toolbars will be displayed
The toolbars which are currently displayed in MS PowerPoint will have a check
mark
3 Click the check marked toolbar to hide the toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
9
DEVELOPING A PRESENTATION
Changing between Presentation View Modes
You can view MS PowerPoint Presentations in different page display modes
1 Click View menu
2 Select Normal Slide Sorter Notes Pages or Slide Show view
Depending on the task at hand some views are better than others
Option To Do This
Normal Contains three panes the outline pane the slide pane and the notes pane These panes let you work on all aspects of your presentation in one place You can adjust
the size of the different panes by dragging the pane borders
Slide Sorter Displays a miniature version of all the slides in your presentation You can use this to check the consistency of the layout and colour scheme You change the order of slides delete slides add timings and select animated transitions for moving from slide to slide
Notes Pages Used to add the speaker‟s or presenter‟s notes or information to be shared with the audience
Slide Show Used to view slides full-screen (without any menu bars) exactly as they would appear projected To exit from Slide Show view press the ESC key
Note that
You can also switch to different views using the view buttons at the bottom
left corner of the PowerPoint screen
Changing the Slide Layout
During this course you will be using the following slide layouts
Title Slide Title amp Text Title amp 2 Column
Text
Title Only
Title amp Chart Title amp Table Text amp Clip art Organisation
Chart
Slide Sorter View
Normal View Slide Show
10
To change the layout of a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide LayouthellipThe Slide Layout task pane will be displayed
3 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to apply a layout
to
4 In the Slide Layout task pane point to the layout you want and then click it
Note that
If you skip step 3 the formatting will be applied to the current slide
Using Design Templates
You don‟t need to be a professional graphic designer to enhance the presentation of
your slides MS PowerPoint comes with many artist-created templates A template is
a presentation in which the masters and the colours have been especially designed for
a particular bdquolook‟ Templates define what your text will look like and where it will
appear and they offer a complete colour scheme
Using the Slide Design task pane you can preview and apply a design template to
your presentation The template can be applied to all slides or selected slides and you
can apply more than one type of design template in a single presentation
To apply a design template to a presentation
1 Click Slide Design button on the Formatting toolbar The Slide
Design task pane will be displayed
2 Click Design Templates in the Slide Design task pane
3 Click the template you want to apply to all the slides
Note that
To apply a template to a single slide select the thumbnail on the Slides tab in
the task pane point to the template and click the arrow and then click Apply
to Selected Slides
To apply a template to multiple selected slides select the thumbnails on the
Slides tab and in the task pane click the template
The design templates you have applied appear below the Recently Used list in
the Slide Design All available design templates appear under Available for
use
To change between available templates repeat steps 1-3 as above
Changing the Background Colour
You can change the background color of a specific slide or all the slides in the
presentation Changing the background is useful if you want to change the background
to emphasize sections of a presentation Besides changing the color you can add
shading a pattern a texture or a picture
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
11
To change the slide background colour
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Background The Background dialog
box will be displayed
3 Under Background fill click the arrow on
the right of the box and then select the
appropriate option
4 Click Apply button or Apply to All button
Note that
If you click the Apply button the background will be applied only to the active
slide or selected slides
Inserting New Slides
Each time you insert a new slide you will choose a speicific layout depending on the
content of the slide Layout refers to the way content is arranged in a slide A layout
contains placeholders which in turn hold text such as titles and bulleted lists and slide
content such as tables charts pictures shapes and clip art
By default the Title Slide layout will be displayed when you open a new presentation
file This layout contains two placeholders ndash the main title and the subtitle placeholder
To insert a new blank slide do either of the following
1 On the Formatting toolbar click New Slide button
2 In the Slide Layout task pane click the layout you want
Note that
If the insertion point is in the Outline or Slides
tab you can insert a new slide by pressing
Enter key
You can also insert a new slide from the Slide
Layout task pane point to a layout click the
arrow and then click Insert New Slide
If you want to keep the Slide Layout task pane
from displaying each time you click New Slide
clear the Show when inserting new slides
check box at the bottom of the pane
Copying Moving Slides
You can copy an entire slide within the same presentation file
1 Click View menu
2 Click Slide Sorter
3 Click the slide to copy A blue frame will be displayed around the selected
slide
4 Click Copy button
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
8
To display additional toolbars
1 Click View menu
2 Select Toolbars
3 Click on the toolbar to put one display The selected toolbar is displayed on
the screen
Toolbars are not fixed to any part of the MS PowerPoint screen ndash they can float
Accordingly you can move toolbars to any part of the screen by dragging them
To move a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Drag the toolbar to any part of the screen
3 Release the mouse button when the toolbar is at the desired location
To turn a fixed toolbar into a floating toolbar
1 Position the mouse pointer on an empty part ie an area without any buttons
of the toolbar to detach
2 Double-click the mouse
To re-attach a floating toolbar
1 Position the pointer anywhere on the title-bar of toolbar
2 Double-click the mouse
The toolbar moves to its home port at the top or bottom of the screen
To hide a toolbar
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Toolbars A sub-menu displaying available toolbars will be displayed
The toolbars which are currently displayed in MS PowerPoint will have a check
mark
3 Click the check marked toolbar to hide the toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
9
DEVELOPING A PRESENTATION
Changing between Presentation View Modes
You can view MS PowerPoint Presentations in different page display modes
1 Click View menu
2 Select Normal Slide Sorter Notes Pages or Slide Show view
Depending on the task at hand some views are better than others
Option To Do This
Normal Contains three panes the outline pane the slide pane and the notes pane These panes let you work on all aspects of your presentation in one place You can adjust
the size of the different panes by dragging the pane borders
Slide Sorter Displays a miniature version of all the slides in your presentation You can use this to check the consistency of the layout and colour scheme You change the order of slides delete slides add timings and select animated transitions for moving from slide to slide
Notes Pages Used to add the speaker‟s or presenter‟s notes or information to be shared with the audience
Slide Show Used to view slides full-screen (without any menu bars) exactly as they would appear projected To exit from Slide Show view press the ESC key
Note that
You can also switch to different views using the view buttons at the bottom
left corner of the PowerPoint screen
Changing the Slide Layout
During this course you will be using the following slide layouts
Title Slide Title amp Text Title amp 2 Column
Text
Title Only
Title amp Chart Title amp Table Text amp Clip art Organisation
Chart
Slide Sorter View
Normal View Slide Show
10
To change the layout of a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide LayouthellipThe Slide Layout task pane will be displayed
3 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to apply a layout
to
4 In the Slide Layout task pane point to the layout you want and then click it
Note that
If you skip step 3 the formatting will be applied to the current slide
Using Design Templates
You don‟t need to be a professional graphic designer to enhance the presentation of
your slides MS PowerPoint comes with many artist-created templates A template is
a presentation in which the masters and the colours have been especially designed for
a particular bdquolook‟ Templates define what your text will look like and where it will
appear and they offer a complete colour scheme
Using the Slide Design task pane you can preview and apply a design template to
your presentation The template can be applied to all slides or selected slides and you
can apply more than one type of design template in a single presentation
To apply a design template to a presentation
1 Click Slide Design button on the Formatting toolbar The Slide
Design task pane will be displayed
2 Click Design Templates in the Slide Design task pane
3 Click the template you want to apply to all the slides
Note that
To apply a template to a single slide select the thumbnail on the Slides tab in
the task pane point to the template and click the arrow and then click Apply
to Selected Slides
To apply a template to multiple selected slides select the thumbnails on the
Slides tab and in the task pane click the template
The design templates you have applied appear below the Recently Used list in
the Slide Design All available design templates appear under Available for
use
To change between available templates repeat steps 1-3 as above
Changing the Background Colour
You can change the background color of a specific slide or all the slides in the
presentation Changing the background is useful if you want to change the background
to emphasize sections of a presentation Besides changing the color you can add
shading a pattern a texture or a picture
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
11
To change the slide background colour
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Background The Background dialog
box will be displayed
3 Under Background fill click the arrow on
the right of the box and then select the
appropriate option
4 Click Apply button or Apply to All button
Note that
If you click the Apply button the background will be applied only to the active
slide or selected slides
Inserting New Slides
Each time you insert a new slide you will choose a speicific layout depending on the
content of the slide Layout refers to the way content is arranged in a slide A layout
contains placeholders which in turn hold text such as titles and bulleted lists and slide
content such as tables charts pictures shapes and clip art
By default the Title Slide layout will be displayed when you open a new presentation
file This layout contains two placeholders ndash the main title and the subtitle placeholder
To insert a new blank slide do either of the following
1 On the Formatting toolbar click New Slide button
2 In the Slide Layout task pane click the layout you want
Note that
If the insertion point is in the Outline or Slides
tab you can insert a new slide by pressing
Enter key
You can also insert a new slide from the Slide
Layout task pane point to a layout click the
arrow and then click Insert New Slide
If you want to keep the Slide Layout task pane
from displaying each time you click New Slide
clear the Show when inserting new slides
check box at the bottom of the pane
Copying Moving Slides
You can copy an entire slide within the same presentation file
1 Click View menu
2 Click Slide Sorter
3 Click the slide to copy A blue frame will be displayed around the selected
slide
4 Click Copy button
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
9
DEVELOPING A PRESENTATION
Changing between Presentation View Modes
You can view MS PowerPoint Presentations in different page display modes
1 Click View menu
2 Select Normal Slide Sorter Notes Pages or Slide Show view
Depending on the task at hand some views are better than others
Option To Do This
Normal Contains three panes the outline pane the slide pane and the notes pane These panes let you work on all aspects of your presentation in one place You can adjust
the size of the different panes by dragging the pane borders
Slide Sorter Displays a miniature version of all the slides in your presentation You can use this to check the consistency of the layout and colour scheme You change the order of slides delete slides add timings and select animated transitions for moving from slide to slide
Notes Pages Used to add the speaker‟s or presenter‟s notes or information to be shared with the audience
Slide Show Used to view slides full-screen (without any menu bars) exactly as they would appear projected To exit from Slide Show view press the ESC key
Note that
You can also switch to different views using the view buttons at the bottom
left corner of the PowerPoint screen
Changing the Slide Layout
During this course you will be using the following slide layouts
Title Slide Title amp Text Title amp 2 Column
Text
Title Only
Title amp Chart Title amp Table Text amp Clip art Organisation
Chart
Slide Sorter View
Normal View Slide Show
10
To change the layout of a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide LayouthellipThe Slide Layout task pane will be displayed
3 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to apply a layout
to
4 In the Slide Layout task pane point to the layout you want and then click it
Note that
If you skip step 3 the formatting will be applied to the current slide
Using Design Templates
You don‟t need to be a professional graphic designer to enhance the presentation of
your slides MS PowerPoint comes with many artist-created templates A template is
a presentation in which the masters and the colours have been especially designed for
a particular bdquolook‟ Templates define what your text will look like and where it will
appear and they offer a complete colour scheme
Using the Slide Design task pane you can preview and apply a design template to
your presentation The template can be applied to all slides or selected slides and you
can apply more than one type of design template in a single presentation
To apply a design template to a presentation
1 Click Slide Design button on the Formatting toolbar The Slide
Design task pane will be displayed
2 Click Design Templates in the Slide Design task pane
3 Click the template you want to apply to all the slides
Note that
To apply a template to a single slide select the thumbnail on the Slides tab in
the task pane point to the template and click the arrow and then click Apply
to Selected Slides
To apply a template to multiple selected slides select the thumbnails on the
Slides tab and in the task pane click the template
The design templates you have applied appear below the Recently Used list in
the Slide Design All available design templates appear under Available for
use
To change between available templates repeat steps 1-3 as above
Changing the Background Colour
You can change the background color of a specific slide or all the slides in the
presentation Changing the background is useful if you want to change the background
to emphasize sections of a presentation Besides changing the color you can add
shading a pattern a texture or a picture
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
11
To change the slide background colour
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Background The Background dialog
box will be displayed
3 Under Background fill click the arrow on
the right of the box and then select the
appropriate option
4 Click Apply button or Apply to All button
Note that
If you click the Apply button the background will be applied only to the active
slide or selected slides
Inserting New Slides
Each time you insert a new slide you will choose a speicific layout depending on the
content of the slide Layout refers to the way content is arranged in a slide A layout
contains placeholders which in turn hold text such as titles and bulleted lists and slide
content such as tables charts pictures shapes and clip art
By default the Title Slide layout will be displayed when you open a new presentation
file This layout contains two placeholders ndash the main title and the subtitle placeholder
To insert a new blank slide do either of the following
1 On the Formatting toolbar click New Slide button
2 In the Slide Layout task pane click the layout you want
Note that
If the insertion point is in the Outline or Slides
tab you can insert a new slide by pressing
Enter key
You can also insert a new slide from the Slide
Layout task pane point to a layout click the
arrow and then click Insert New Slide
If you want to keep the Slide Layout task pane
from displaying each time you click New Slide
clear the Show when inserting new slides
check box at the bottom of the pane
Copying Moving Slides
You can copy an entire slide within the same presentation file
1 Click View menu
2 Click Slide Sorter
3 Click the slide to copy A blue frame will be displayed around the selected
slide
4 Click Copy button
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
10
To change the layout of a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide LayouthellipThe Slide Layout task pane will be displayed
3 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to apply a layout
to
4 In the Slide Layout task pane point to the layout you want and then click it
Note that
If you skip step 3 the formatting will be applied to the current slide
Using Design Templates
You don‟t need to be a professional graphic designer to enhance the presentation of
your slides MS PowerPoint comes with many artist-created templates A template is
a presentation in which the masters and the colours have been especially designed for
a particular bdquolook‟ Templates define what your text will look like and where it will
appear and they offer a complete colour scheme
Using the Slide Design task pane you can preview and apply a design template to
your presentation The template can be applied to all slides or selected slides and you
can apply more than one type of design template in a single presentation
To apply a design template to a presentation
1 Click Slide Design button on the Formatting toolbar The Slide
Design task pane will be displayed
2 Click Design Templates in the Slide Design task pane
3 Click the template you want to apply to all the slides
Note that
To apply a template to a single slide select the thumbnail on the Slides tab in
the task pane point to the template and click the arrow and then click Apply
to Selected Slides
To apply a template to multiple selected slides select the thumbnails on the
Slides tab and in the task pane click the template
The design templates you have applied appear below the Recently Used list in
the Slide Design All available design templates appear under Available for
use
To change between available templates repeat steps 1-3 as above
Changing the Background Colour
You can change the background color of a specific slide or all the slides in the
presentation Changing the background is useful if you want to change the background
to emphasize sections of a presentation Besides changing the color you can add
shading a pattern a texture or a picture
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
11
To change the slide background colour
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Background The Background dialog
box will be displayed
3 Under Background fill click the arrow on
the right of the box and then select the
appropriate option
4 Click Apply button or Apply to All button
Note that
If you click the Apply button the background will be applied only to the active
slide or selected slides
Inserting New Slides
Each time you insert a new slide you will choose a speicific layout depending on the
content of the slide Layout refers to the way content is arranged in a slide A layout
contains placeholders which in turn hold text such as titles and bulleted lists and slide
content such as tables charts pictures shapes and clip art
By default the Title Slide layout will be displayed when you open a new presentation
file This layout contains two placeholders ndash the main title and the subtitle placeholder
To insert a new blank slide do either of the following
1 On the Formatting toolbar click New Slide button
2 In the Slide Layout task pane click the layout you want
Note that
If the insertion point is in the Outline or Slides
tab you can insert a new slide by pressing
Enter key
You can also insert a new slide from the Slide
Layout task pane point to a layout click the
arrow and then click Insert New Slide
If you want to keep the Slide Layout task pane
from displaying each time you click New Slide
clear the Show when inserting new slides
check box at the bottom of the pane
Copying Moving Slides
You can copy an entire slide within the same presentation file
1 Click View menu
2 Click Slide Sorter
3 Click the slide to copy A blue frame will be displayed around the selected
slide
4 Click Copy button
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
11
To change the slide background colour
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Background The Background dialog
box will be displayed
3 Under Background fill click the arrow on
the right of the box and then select the
appropriate option
4 Click Apply button or Apply to All button
Note that
If you click the Apply button the background will be applied only to the active
slide or selected slides
Inserting New Slides
Each time you insert a new slide you will choose a speicific layout depending on the
content of the slide Layout refers to the way content is arranged in a slide A layout
contains placeholders which in turn hold text such as titles and bulleted lists and slide
content such as tables charts pictures shapes and clip art
By default the Title Slide layout will be displayed when you open a new presentation
file This layout contains two placeholders ndash the main title and the subtitle placeholder
To insert a new blank slide do either of the following
1 On the Formatting toolbar click New Slide button
2 In the Slide Layout task pane click the layout you want
Note that
If the insertion point is in the Outline or Slides
tab you can insert a new slide by pressing
Enter key
You can also insert a new slide from the Slide
Layout task pane point to a layout click the
arrow and then click Insert New Slide
If you want to keep the Slide Layout task pane
from displaying each time you click New Slide
clear the Show when inserting new slides
check box at the bottom of the pane
Copying Moving Slides
You can copy an entire slide within the same presentation file
1 Click View menu
2 Click Slide Sorter
3 Click the slide to copy A blue frame will be displayed around the selected
slide
4 Click Copy button
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
12
5 Click at the location where the slide will be copied
6 Click Paste button
Note that
You can also switch to the Slide Sorter View by clicking the Slide Sorter
View button
You can also copy a slide to a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
4 Repeat steps 5-6 as above
You can move re-order slides in a presentation
1 Switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide Sorter View button
2 Click the slide to move
3 Drag the slide to the new position
You can move slides to another presentation file
1 In the first presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view by clicking Slide
Sorter View button
2 Right-click the slide to move
3 Click Cut button
4 In the second presentation file switch to Slide Sorter view and click at the
location where the slide will be copied
5 Click Paste button
Note that
If you want to select more than one slide click on the first slide press and
hold CTRL key and click on the next slides
Deleting Slides
1 On the Outline tab or Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to
delete
2 Click the Edit menu
3 Click Delete Slide
Note that
If you want to select slides in order press and hold SHIFT key as you click
If you want to select slides that are not in order press and hold CTRL key as
you click
Instead of step 2 and 3 above you can press the DELETE key to delete slides
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
13
Inserting a Graphical Object into the Master Slide
The Slide Master is the slide that holds the format for all slides in the presentation It
enables you to add background items that you want to appear on every slide in a
presentation If you make a change to the Slide Master (eg choosing a special font
for the text italicising the slide title or changing the bullet styles) the change affects
all slides in your presentation that follow the master You can also add a logo or page
number to a slide
To display the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master MS PowerPoint will display a slide similar to the following
Also the Slide Master View toolbar will be displayed
4 To return to the normal view click Close Master View button in the Slide
Master View toolbar
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 Click Insert menu
3 Point to Picture
4 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
5 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you
want or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
6 Click Search button
7 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in the Slide Master
1 Click View menu
2 Point to Master
3 Click Slide Master
4 Click Insert menu
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
14
5 Point to Picture
6 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
7 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
8 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Repeat steps 1-3 as above
2 On the Drawing toolbar click AutoShapes button
3 Point to a category and click the shape you want
To delete the clip art image or drawn object in the Slide Master
1 Click the clip art image or drawn object to delete
2 Press Delete key
Adding Footers
Footers consist of text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides To add
text slide numbers and a date at the bottom of your slides
1 Click View menu
2 Click Header and Footerhellip
3 Select or enter the appropriate options
4 Click Apply to All or Apply button
Note that
If you dont want the information to appear on the title slide select the Dont
show on title slide check box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
15
Option To Do This
Date and Time
Update automatically
Displays and updates the current date and time in the slide footer Click the date and time format you want in the Update automatically list This option is unavailable unless the Date and time check box is
selected
Fixed Displays the date and time in the slide footer Type the date and time you want in the Fixed box
Slide number Adds the slide number to the slide footer
Footer Adds the text you type in the Footer box to the bottom of the slide
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
16
TEXT
Adding Editing amp Deleting Text
To add or edit text in a slide
1 Click in a text placeholder Sizing handles will be displayed at the edges of the
placeholder
2 Type in or edit text as necessary
3 Click outside the placeholder to deselect it
Note that
If your text exceeds the size of the placeholder MS PowerPoint reduces the
font size and line spacing incrementally as you type to make the text fit
You can also insert text in the Outline view
1 In the Normal view click the Outline tab
2 Position the pointer at the appropriate
location and addedit text as necessary
Note that
As a good practice you should avoid long
sentences or paragraphs in a slide Keep
your text short (concise) Use bullet points
and numbered lists for your text as appropriate
To delete text
1 Select the text to delete
2 Press DELETE key
Moving amp Copying Text
You can move text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
17
You can copy text from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Select the text graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the text will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate text placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy text from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Using UndoRedo Command
There are different types of actions that you can undo actions you make yourself
such as typing a word or actions that MS PowerPoint makes automatically using the
AutoCorrect feature such as automatically capitalizing the first letter of a sentence
To undo or redo your most recent actions
On the Standard toolbar click Undo or Redo button This
will undo or redo the last action
Note that
To undo or redo your most recent action (or actions) click the arrow next to
Undo or Redo select the actions you want to undo or redo and click
Changing Font Types amp Sizes
A font is a collection of characters (letters numerals symbols and punctuation marks)
that have a particular design The font size determines the size of the selected
characters The height of a character is expressed in points (1 point = 172rdquo) The
larger the number the larger the character
To change the font style of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font style
2 Click the Font Style drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate font style to apply
Note that
To change the font for all the text in a placeholder either drag to select all the
text or select the placeholder containing the text To select the placeholder
first click the text The placeholder border becomes hatchmarked Point to the
border and click The border changes to a thick dotted border and its now
selected
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
18
To change the font size
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
font size
2 Click the Font Size drop-down arrow
3 Click the appropriate size to apply
Note that
You can also increase the font size using the Increase Font Size button
You can decrease the font size using the Decrease Font Size button
Typestyles Bold Italics Underline amp Shadow
Typestyles are applied to text to emphasise it There are several ways of emphasising
text using either or a combination of the following typestyles
Typestyle Button Effect Shortcut Key
Bold to make the characters look darker CTRL+B
Italics
to slant the characters to the right CTRL+I
Underline
to underline characters CTRL+U
Shadow
to apply a shadow effect to characters na
To apply typestyles
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
typestyles to
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons required
To remove typestyles from text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to remove its
typestyles
2 Click the appropriate typestyles buttons to remove
Changing Text Colour
To apply a different colour to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply colour
to
2 Click Font Colour button drop-down arrow on the Formatting toolbar
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
19
Applying Case Changes to Text
You can change the case of a text to uppercase lower case title case sentence case
etc
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
case
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Change Casehellip
4 Click the appropriate case option
5 Click OK button
Option To Do This
Sentence case Capitalises the first letter of the first word in the selected sentences
lowercase Changes all selected text to lowercase letters
UPPERCASE Changes all selected text to capital letters
Title Case Capitalises the first letter of each word in the selection
tOGGLE cASE Changes all uppercase letters to lowercase in the selection and vice versa
Aligning Text
This facility is important to change the position of text in relation to the left and right
edges of the placeholder
There are four different alignment options
This is left-aligned text This is centered text
This is right-aligned text
This is justified text If this text is on a line that is shorter than the paragraph width it will remain aligned left
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
20
Option To Do This
Left Aligns each line of the paragraph with the left edge of the placeholder leaving a ragged right edge which means that there is no alignment on the right side
Centered Aligns each line of the paragraph between the left and right edges of the placeholder
Right Aligns each line of the paragraph with the right edge of the placeholder leaving a
ragged left edge which means that there is no alignment on the left side
Justified Aligns paragraph text so that both the left and right margins have a straight edge creating blocks
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to align
2 Click
Alignment option Button Shortcut Key
Align Left button CTRL+L
Center button CTRL+E
Align Right button CTRL+R
Justify button CTRL+J
Note that
The Justify button can be accessed through the Alignment option in the
Format menu
Applying Removing Indentations
You can indent bulleted text in a slide
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Increase Indent button
To remove indent from bulleted text
1 Highlight the bulleted text or position the cursor in the bullet text to indent 2 Click Decrease Indent button
Adjusting Line Spacing
There is no limit to the amount of text you can add to a slide However avoid the use
of long sentences Suitably spaced short text is more effective to convey your
message
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to adjust its
spacing
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
21
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Line Spacing
4 Enter the appropriate adjustments
5 Click OK button
The new spacing will be applied to the selected paragraphs or paragraph containing
the insertion point
Option To Do This
Line Spacing Sets the amount of space you want between lines of selected text
Before Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave before the first line of each
selected paragraph
After Paragraph Sets the amount of space you want to leave after each selected paragraph
Applying Changing Bullet amp Number Styles
To apply bullets to text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
bullets to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Bulleted tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
Note that
You can also apply bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button However this method does not allow you to choose from the
different bullet styles available in MS PowerPoint
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
22
To remove bullet lists
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove bullets by highlighting the text and clicking the Bullets
button
To modify bullet style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
bullet style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate bullet style or click the Character button
5 Select one of the Bullet styles available
6 Click OK button
To apply numbering to a list of text
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to apply
numbering to
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Click Numbered tab
5 Click any one of the 7 bullet styles
6 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
23
Note that
You can also apply numbering highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button However this method does not allow you to choose
from the different numbering styles available in MS PowerPoint
To remove numbering
1 Repeat steps 1-4 as for above
2 Click None
3 Click OK Button
Note that
You can also remove numbering by highlighting the text and clicking the
Numbering button
To modify the numbering style
1 Select the text or the placeholder containing the text you want to change its
numbering style
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Bullets and Numbering The Bullets and Numbering dialog box will
be displayed
4 Select the appropriate numbering style
5 Click OK button
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
24
Entering Editing Text in Table Slide
To create a table in a slide
1 Apply a Table slide layout
2 Double-click the icon in the middle of the slide to
add the table
3 Set the number of columns and rows needed for
the table
4 Click OK button
To insert text in the table
1 Click in the cell where you want to insert the table
2 Type the text
Note that
To move from one cell to the next press TAB key
Selecting Rows Columns amp Entire Table
To highlight a row column or the entire table
Highlight Action
Row Drag the mouse across the row
Column Drag the mouse down the column
Table Drag the mouse from the top left to the bottom right of the table
Inserting Deleting Rows amp Columns
To insert a row
1 Highlight the row where the new row will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Insert Rows
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
25
To insert a column
1 Highlight the column where the new column will be inserted
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Insert Columns
To delete a row
1 Highlight the row to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted row
3 Click Delete Rows
To delete a column
1 Highlight the column to delete
2 Right-click the highlighted column
3 Click Delete Columns
Modifying Column Widths amp Row Heights
You can change the widthheight of selected columns and rows by dragging the
columnrow borders
To modify the column width
1 Rest the pointer on the column boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary to the left or right until the column is at the width you
want
To modify the row height
1 Rest the pointer on the row boundary you want to move until it
becomes
2 Drag the the boundary up or down until the row is at the height you want
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
26
CHARTS
Creating Charts
MS PowerPoint gives you the ability to insert charts or graphs directly in your
presentation These become particularly important when you want your audience to
visualise numeric data Different charts may be used depending on what the numeric
data represents
Pie charts are used for figures representing percentages
Line charts are used to demonstrate a trend in numeric data
Bar charts are used to compare different sets of numbers
To insert a graph in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Title amp Chart Layout from the Slide Layout task
pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the graph placeholder
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays a table containing data (a miniature spreadsheet)
known as datasheet and immediately below this a bar graph based on the
table data
If you click outside the graph the datasheet will disappear Double-click the
chart to re-display the datasheet
A datasheet looks like a spreadsheet Information is entered in cells which are formed
by the intersection of rows and columns For most types of charts each column
represents a category of data while each row is a data series and is marked with a
symbol ndash for example a small 3-D bar ndash to indicate what type of chart you are
creating
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
27
To edit data in the datasheet window
1 Click the cell at the top left corner All cells will be highlighted
2 Press Delete key All the data will be removed from the datasheet
3 Type the new data
As new data is entered in the datasheet the graph is created
Selecting a Chart
Double-click the chart to select The datasheet will also be displayed
Changing the Chart Type
By default MS PowerPoint displays a bar chart You can change the sample chart
inserted as follows
1 Click Chart menu
2 Click Chart Type The Chart Type dialog box will be displayed
3 In the Chart Type category select the chart to use
4 Select the Chart sub-type (on the right) The chart sub-type name appears
in the message area below the chart sub-types
5 Press and hold the mouse on the Press and Hold to View Sample button
6 Click OK button to apply the new chart type
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
28
Adding Removing amp Editing a Chart Title
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
4 In the Titles tab click in the Chart title field
5 Type edit or remove the title
6 Click OK button
Adding Data Labels
1 Double-click the chart to add a title to
2 Click Chart menu
3 Click Chart Optionshellip
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
29
4 Tick Value to add values or numbers If you are working on a pie-chart you
can tick Percentage
5 Click OK button
Changing Colour in a Chart
You can modify the colours of the chart area plot area and data series
1 Click anywhere on the chart area (outside the plot area) plot area or data
series
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Selected Chart Areahellip Selected Wallshellip or Selected Data Series
The Format Chart Area or Walls or Data Series dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Patterns tab
5 Select the appropriate colours for the Border and Area
6 Click OK button
Creating an Organisation Chart
To insert an organisation chart in a slide
1 Click Format menu
2 Click Slide Layouthellip
3 Select Organisation Chart Layout from the
Slide Layout task pane
4 Click OK button
5 Double-click the organisation chart placeholder The Diagram Gallery will be
displayed
6 Select organisation chart below Select a diagram type
7 Click OK button
Note that
MS PowerPoint displays an organisation chart template and the organisation
chart toolbar
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
30
To enter text
1 Click the box you want to type in
2 Begin typing in the first line
3 Press Enter key and type in the
second line
4 Click outside the text box when
you are ready ndash the data entered
in the current box will be
retained
Note that
To edit the content of a text box click in the text box and enter your typing
Adding Removing Co-workers amp Subordinates
To add managers co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Click Insert Shape drop-down arrow button in the Organisation Chart
toolbar
3 Click Subordinate Co-worker or Assistant
To delete co-workers and sub-ordinates
1 Click the appropriate text box
2 Press Delete key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
31
GRAPHICAL OBJECTS
To insert a picture from the clip art gallery in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click Clip Arthellip The Insert Clip Art task pane will be displayed
4 In the Search text box type a word or phrase that describes the clip you want
or type in all or some of the file name of the clip
5 Click Search button
6 Click the graphic to insert
Note that
You can resize and re-position the picture as necessary Read further down for
more details
To clear the search criteria fields and begin a new search below the Results
box click Modify
To insert an image in a slide
1 Click Insert menu
2 Point to Picture
3 Click From Filehellip The Insert Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Browse to the diskfolder where the image file is located
5 Click Insert button The picture will be inserted
To insert a drawn object
1 Click AutoShapes button on the Drawing toolbar
2 Highlight Basic Shapes
3 Click the shape to add
4 Draw the shape on the slide
Selecting a Graphical Object
To select a clipart image or drawn object
1 Click the graphical object
2 The boundary of the graphical object displays 6 sizing handles
To deselect a clipart image or drawn object
Click anywhere outside the graphical object
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
32
Copying Moving Graphical Objects
You can copy graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the graphic to copy
2 Click Copy button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also copy graphics from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
You can move graphics from one slide to another within the same presentation
1 Highlight the image to move
2 Click Cut button
3 Move to the slide where the graphic will be inserted
4 Click in the appropriate graphic placeholder
5 Click Paste button
You can also move images from one slide to another in a different presentation file
1 Repeat steps 1-2 as for above
2 Open the other presentation file
3 Repeat steps 3-5 as above
Resizing Deleting Graphical Objects
You can resize graphics manually
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the sizing handles The pointer changes
to a double-headed arrow
3 To increase or decrease the size in one or more directions drag the mouse
away from or toward the centre
4 Release the mouse
Note that
To keep the centre of an object in the same place hold down CTRL key while
dragging the mouse
To maintain the objects proportions hold down SHIFT key while dragging the
mouse
To maintain the proportions while keeping the centre in the same place hold
down CTRL + SHIFT key while dragging the mouse
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
33
You can resize a graphic to an exact height and width
1 Click the graphic to resize Sizing handles appear on the border of the graphic
2 Click Format menu
3 Click Picturehellip The Format Picture dialog box will be displayed
4 Click Size tab
5 Enter measurements for the height and width of the object
6 Click OK button
Note that
If the Lock aspect ratio box is checked the height and width settings change
in relation to one another
To delete a graphical object
1 Highlight the graphic to delete
2 Press Backspace or Delete key
Rotating Flipping a Graphical Object
To rotate a graphic
1 Click the graphic to rotate
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Rotate or Flip The sizing handles are replaced by green circles known
as rotate handles
4 Drag the rotate handle on the object in the direction you want to rotate it
5 Click outside the object to set the rotation
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
34
Note that
You can limit the object‟s rotation to 15 steps by holding down SHIFT key
whilst dragging the mouse
You can also rotate an object 90 to the left or to the right by repeating steps
1-3 as above and clicking Rotate Left or Rotate Right
To flip a graphic
1 Click the graphic
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Rotate or Flip
4 Choose Flip Horizontal or Flip
Vertical
Aligning a Graphical Object
You can align an object to the left centre right top and bottom of a slide
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Draw button
3 Point to Align or Distribute
4 Click the option Relative to Slide
5 Repeat step 3
6 Click the appropriate option
Inserting Drawn Objects
The Drawing toolbar includes a number of tools for drawing simple objects including
lines free drawn lines arrows rectangles squares circles text boxes and other
shapes You will use the Drawing toolbar to draw shapes in your documents
To draw a line
1 Click Line button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the line to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
If the Drawing toolbar is not visible click View menu point to Toolbars and
click Drawings
To constrain the line to draw at 15-degree angles from its starting point hold
down SHIFT key as you drag
To lengthen the line in opposite directions from the first end point hold down
CTRL key as you drag
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
35
To draw a free form line
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Point to Lines
3 Click Freeform button
4 Place the cursor where you want the line to begin
5 Click and drag to draw the line
6 Release the mouse button when ready
To draw an arrow
1 Click Arrow button on the Drawing toolbar
2 The mouse pointer changes to a cross hair
3 Place the cursor where you want the arrow to begin
4 Click and drag to where you want the arrow to end
5 Release the mouse button
Note that
To change the arrow startend style click the Arrow Style button on the
Drawing toolbar Select the appropriate option
To draw a rectanglesquare
1 Click Rectangle button
2 Place the cursor where you want one corner of the rectangle
3 Click and drag diagonally to where you want the opposite corner of the
rectangle
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a square hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
To draw an ovalcircle
1 Click Oval button
2 Place the cursor where you want the shape to begin
3 Click and drag until the shape is the size you want
4 Release the mouse button
Note that
To draw a circle hold down SHIFT key as you drag the mouse
A text box is a rectangular area where you can insert text To draw a text box
1 Click Text Box button
2 Place the cursor where you want to type
3 Click the cursor
4 Start typing
Note that
You can resize the text box by clicking on this position the pointer on one of
the sizing handles and drag
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
36
To draw other shapes
1 Click AutoShapes button
2 Select the appropriate category of shapes
3 Draw the shape
Adding Text to a Drawn Object
You can add text into a text box block arrow rectangle square oval and circle
1 Right click the drawn object
2 Click Add Text The drawn object displays a cursor
3 Type the text
Formatting Drawn Objects
To change the background colour of a drawn object
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Fill Colour button
3 Select the appropriate background colour for the drawn object
To change the line colour of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify
2 Click Line Colour button
3 Select the colour to apply
To change the line style amp weight of a drawn object
1 Select the line to modify its style Sizing handles appear at the left and right
edge of the line
2 Click Line Style button
3 Select the appropriate line style and weight (thickness)
Changing the Arrow Start Finish Style
To change the arrow start style and finish style
1 Double-click the drawn arrow in the slide
2 Choose the appropriate Begin style and or End style
3 Click OK button
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
37
Applying Shadow to a Shape
1 Click the drawn object
2 Click Shadow button A menu containing different shadow styles
appear
3 Click the appropriate shadow option
Note that
When you apply a shadow to a text box all text and attributes of the text box
take on the shadow effect
Grouping Ungrouping Drawn Objects
Before you can group two or more objects you need to select these
1 Click the first drawn object
2 Press and hold CTRL key
3 Click the next drawn objects
4 Release the mouse button
5 Release the CTRL key
To group drawn objects
1 Select the objects you want to group
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Group
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
38
To ungroup drawn objects
1 Select the group you want to ungroup
2 On the Drawing toolbar click Draw button
3 Click Ungroup
Bringing an Object to the Front or Sending it to the Back
1 Click the object to bring to front or send to back
2 Click Draw button on the Drawing toolbar
3 Point to Order
4 Click the appropriate option
Option To Do This
Bring to Front To bring an object to the front
Send to Back To send an object to the back
Bring Forward To bring an object one step closer to the front
Send Backward To send an object one step toward the back
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
39
PREPARING OUTPUTS
Adding Removing Transition Effects
Transitions are the visual special effects you see when you go from one slide to the
next in an electronic slide show
To add the same transition effect to all the slides
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Slide Transition The Slide Transition task pane will be displayed
3 Click the transition effect to apply
4 Click Apply to All Slides button
To add different transitions between slides
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slides you want to add a
transition to
2 Repeat steps 1-2 as above
3 In the list click the transition effect you want
Note that
Repeat the following process for each slide you
want to add a different transition to
Adding Removing Preset Animations
You can animate text graphics sounds movies and
other objects on your slides so you can focus on
important points control the flow of information and
add interest to your presentation
You can have each main bullet point appear
independently of others or you can have objects appear
progressively one after another You can set up the
way you want each bullet point or object to appear on
your slide to fly in from the left for example and
whether you want other bullets or objects to dim or
change colour when you add a new element
You can apply a preset animation scheme
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click Animation Schemeshellip The Slide Design
task pane will be displayed
3 Under Apply to selected slides click an
animation scheme in the list
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
40
Note that
If you want to apply the scheme to all slides click the Apply to All Slides
button
To preview animations for a slide click Play button in the Slide Design task
pane
To preview how the set animations will be displayed click Slide Show
button in the Slide Design task pane
To change a preset animation repeat steps 1-3 as above
To remove a preset animation repeat step 1-2 as above and click No
Animation under Apply to selected slides
Adding Presenterrsquos Notes
You can add speaker‟s notes for any or all of the slides in your presentation
Normally these notes are used as a quick reference for key points you want to make
during a presentation You can print the notes for your reference during the
presentation
You can add presenter‟s notes using the Normal view or the Notes Page view
To add presenter notes using the Normal view
1 Click the notes pane
2 Type your notes for the current slide
Note that
To see more of the notes pane point to the top border of the notes pane
until the pointer becomes a double-headed arrow and then drag until the
pane is the size you want
To move to other slides (to add notes) use the SlideOutline tab
To add presenter notes using the Notes Page view
1 Click View menu
2 Click Notes Pages The Notes Page that corresponds to the slide you are
working on appears An image of the current slide appears at the top of the
Notes Page
3 Click the notes box below the slide
4 Type your notes in the box below the slide image
Note that
To enlarge the Notes Page view click the Zoom Control button on the
Standard toolbar
If you want to provide pages on which your audience can make notes then
print notes pages but leave the notes area blank If you plan to make some
notes by hand below the slide try putting some lines in the notes box
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
41
Selecting an Output Format
You can select an appropriate output format for the slide presentation such as
overhead handout 35mm slides and on-screen show You can also change the slide
orientation (portrait or landscape) and paper size
1 Click File menu
2 Click Page Setuphellip
3 Click the drop-down arrow below Slides sized for
4 Select the appropriate option
5 Click OK button
Hiding Showing Slides
You may wish to hide a slide from being displayed during your presentation To hide a
slide
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the slide you want to hide
2 Click Slide Show menu
3 Click Hide Slide
Note that
The hidden slide icon appears with the slide number inside next to the
slide you have hidden
The slide remains in your file even though it is hidden when you run the
presentation
To reset a hidden slide to be viewed in a slide show
1 On the Slides tab in normal view select the hidden slide you want to make
visible again
2 Repeat steps 2-3 as above
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
42
Spell Checking a Presentation
By default MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the text in your slides and
presenter‟s notes Every single word in each slide and notes is compared to a built-in
dictionary available in MS Office A wavy red line appears beneath words that are not
found in the dictionary
However at times a word can be spelled correctly yet MS PowerPoint does not find it
in its dictionary Proper nouns (Rita) specialised terms (phototranspiration) acronyms
and abbreviations (UOM) etc are not likely to be in the MS Office dictionary If you do
not want MS PowerPoint to question such words during spell checks you can add
them to a custom dictionary In addition to spelling mistakes MS PowerPoint also
alerts you to repeated words - for example ldquothe therdquo - and words that have an unusual
pattern of capitalisation such as ldquoPLayrdquo
To use the automatic spelling check
1 Right-click the mouse over the word having a wavy red underline
2 A pop-up menu appears listing any suggestions Word may have about the
correct spelling or grammar as well as the following choices Ignore Delete
repeated word Add and Spelling Click any suggestion and the appropriate
option
You can also resolve errors without using the pop-up menu by simply editing the text
MS PowerPoint checks the spelling of the word again as soon as you move your cursor
away from it and if the word is now spelled correctly the red line disappears
To run the spelling and grammar check
1 Click Spelling and Grammar button
2 Click the appropriate options (refer to the following table)
3 Click OK button when MS PowerPoint displays a message that it has checked
all text in the document
Option To Do This
Not In Dictionary
Displays a possible error such as an incorrectly spelled word a duplicate word a grammar error or incorrect capitalization Edit the text in this box to correct it and then click Change or click the correct word in the Suggestions box and then click Change
Suggestions Lists a number of words close to the incorrectly spelled word Click the
appropriate suggestion to choose it
Ignore Leaves the word unchanged and continues with the checking The spell checker stops if the same word is encountered within the same document This button changes to Resume if you click in the document to edit the document
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
43
Option To Do This
Ignore All Leaves the word unchanged and skips any occurrences of the same word within the entire document throughout the rest of the current MS PowerPoint session
Add Adds the word in the Not In Dictionary box to the custom dictionary
Change Replaces the incorrectly spelled word with the highlighted wordphrase in the Suggestions box When the selected error is a repeated word this button changes to Delete so you can easily remove the second instance of the word
Change All Replaces all occurrences of the same incorrectly spelled word with the wordphrase in the Suggestions box
Autocorrect Adds a word to the AutoCorrect list so that Word can correct any incorrect
spelling of it automatically as you type
Note that
If the insertion point or selection was not at the beginning of your document
when you begin checking spelling MS PowerPoint asks if you want to continue
checking from the beginning of the document
MS PowerPoint doesnt check the spelling in embedded objects such as charts
or in inserted objects such as MS Word documents
If the insertion point is in the notes pane or slide pane the spelling check
alternates checking between the two If the insertion point is on the Outline
tab all the slides are checked first then all the notes
Printing
Like all other computer application programs MS PowerPoint has its printing features
These are somewhat different from MS Word because you can print different
components of your presentation You can print slides outlines notes pages and
handouts
1 Click File menu
2 Click Print The Print dialog box will be displayed
3 Select the range of slides or notes pages to be printed
4 In the Copies box type the number of copies you want to print
5 Select what you want to print in the Print what box (refer to the table)
6 Choose any additional print options (refer to the table)
7 Click OK button
Option To Do This
All Prints all the slides in the presentation
Current Slide Prints the current slide or notes page
Selection Prints all the slides that are currently selected
Slides Prints the range of slides or notes pages you specify If you type only
a beginning number all slides or notes pages from that slide or notes page will be printed If you want to print only one slide or notes page type that slides number in both boxes
Handouts (2 slides per page)
Prints two slide images per page (use for the largest images and the greatest amount of detail)
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
44
Option To Do This
Handouts (3 slides per page)
Prints three slide images per page (use when you want space for notes on one side of the page)
Handouts (6 slides per page)
Prints six slide images per page
Notes Pages Prints the presenter‟s notes pages that correspond to the slide
numbers you request
Outline View Prints your outline according to how your outline appears on-screen in Outline view An outline can be formatted or unformatted (plain text) and expanded or collapsed (titles only) Also the type size depends on the view scale in which you are working
Scale To Fit Paper Scales slides automatically to fit the paper loaded in your printer
Frame Slides Adds a thin frame around the border of printed slides handouts and notes pages
Include comment pages
Prints pages containing comments for all slides that contain comments When printing slides all comments for a slide are printed on one page When printing handouts a comment page contains comments from all the slides on a handout page
Print Hidden Slides Prints all hidden slides Otherwise slides marked as hidden arent printed
Pure Black amp White
Turns all colours fills to white all text and lines to black adds outlines or borders to all filled objects and renders pictures in greyscale This option is useful when you want to print draft copies on a colour printer
or when you want to print very readable speakers notes and handouts
Black amp White Turns all fills to white (or black and white if patterned) Unbordered objects that have no text appear with a thin black frame
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key
ECDL Syllabus 5 Courseware Module 6
45
Option To Do This
Preview Displays your slides handouts notes or outline as they will look when printed
Running the Slide Show
In Slide Show view you see your slides as an electronic presentation on your
computer Each slide fills the screen
You can start a slide show so that the entire presentation will be displayed starting
from the first slide
1 Click Slide Show menu
2 Click View Show
Note that
To start a slide show on the current slide click Slide show (from current
slide) button
During the Slide Show you can navigate from one slide to the next or to a specific
slide as indicated here
To Do This
Advance to the next slide Mouse click SPACEBAR N RIGHT ARROW DOWN ARROW or PAGE DOWN
Return to the previous slide Right click mouse BACKSPACE P LEFT ARROW UP ARROW or PAGE UP
Go to a specific slide Press number key followed by ENTER key